Nikon Camcorder D5200 User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA  
Reference Manual  
En  
Package Contents  
Confirm that the package contains the following items:  
BS-1 accessory shoe cover  
DK-20 rubber eyecup  
BF-1B body cap  
D5200 camera  
EN-EL14 rechargeable  
Li-ion battery (with terminal  
cover)  
MH-24 battery charger (plug  
adapter supplied in countries or  
regions where required; shape  
depends on country of sale)  
AN-DC3 strap  
UC-E17 USB cable  
EG-CP16 audio/video cable  
DK-5 eyepiece cap (0 32)  
ViewNX 2 CD-ROM  
User’s Manual  
Reference CD (contains this manual)  
Warranty  
Purchasers of the lens kit option should confirm that the package also includes a lens.  
Memory cards are sold separately (0 211). Cameras purchased in Japan display  
menus and messages in English and Japanese only; other languages are not  
supported. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause.  
i
 
Q&A Index  
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index.  
0
Taking Photographs  
Shooting Modes and Framing Options  
i
Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots?  
How do I quickly adjust settings for different scenes?  
Can I use special effects during shooting?  
Can I adjust shutter speed to freeze or blur motion (mode S)?  
Can I adjust aperture to blur backgrounds or bring them into focus  
(mode A)?  
How do I make long (“time”) exposures (mode M)?  
Can I frame photos in the monitor (live view)?  
Can I shoot movies?  
Release Modes  
i
Can I take photos one at a time or in quick succession?  
How do I take pictures with the self-timer or a remote control?  
Can I reduce shutter noise in quiet surroundings (quiet shutter  
release) ?  
Focus  
i
Can I choose how the camera focuses?  
Can I choose the focus point?  
Image Quality and Size  
i
How do I take pictures for printing at large sizes?  
How can I get more pictures on the memory card?  
Exposure  
i
Can I make photos brighter or darker?  
How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights?  
Using the Flash  
i
Can I set the flash to fire automatically when needed?  
How do I keep the flash from firing?  
How do I avoid “red-eye”?  
0
Viewing Photographs  
Playback  
i
How do I view photographs on the camera?  
How do I view more information about a photo?  
Can I view photos in an automatic slide show?  
Can I view photos on a TV?  
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion?  
Deletion  
i
How do I delete unwanted photos?  
ii  
 
0
Retouching Photographs  
How do I create retouched copies of photos?  
How do I remove “red-eye”?  
How do I make JPEG copies of RAW (NEF) photos?  
Can I overlay two NEF (RAW) photos to make a single image?  
Can I create a copy of a photo that looks like a painting?  
Can I trim movie footage on the camera or save movie stills?  
0
Menus and Settings  
How do I adjust settings in the information display?  
How do I use the menus?  
How do I display menus in another language?  
How do I keep the displays from turning off?  
How do I focus the viewfinder?  
Can I display a framing grid in the monitor?  
How do I set the camera clock?  
How do I format memory cards?  
How do I restore default settings?  
Is there any way to stop the camera beeping?  
How do I get help for a menu or message?  
0
Connections  
How do I copy photos to a computer?  
How do I print photos?  
Can I print the date of recording on my photos?  
0
Maintenance and Optional Accessories  
What memory cards can I use?  
What lenses can I use?  
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use?  
What other accessories are available for my camera?  
What software is available for my camera?  
What do I do with the supplied eyepiece cap?  
How do I clean the camera?  
Where should I take my camera for servicing and repairs?  
iii  
Table of Contents  
iv  
 
v
vi  
vii  
viii  
ix  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following  
safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions  
where all those who use the product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this  
section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using  
this Nikon product.  
A
WARNINGS  
Keep the sun out of the frame  
Keep out of reach of children  
A
A
A
Keep the sun well out of the frame when  
shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight  
focused into the camera when the sun is  
in or close to the frame could cause a fire.  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in injury. In addition, note that  
small parts constitute a choking hazard.  
Should a child swallow any part of this  
equipment, consult a physician  
immediately.  
Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
A
A
Do not disassemble  
Touching the product’s internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified technician.  
Should the product break open as the  
result of a fall or other accident, remove  
the battery and/or AC adapter and then  
take the product to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control  
When operating the viewfinder diopter  
adjustment control with your eye to the  
viewfinder, care should be taken not to  
put your finger in your eye accidentally.  
Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an unusual  
smell coming from the equipment or AC  
adapter (available separately), unplug  
the AC adapter and remove the battery  
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.  
Continued operation could result in  
injury. After removing the battery, take  
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
A
Do not place the strap around the neck of an  
infant or child  
Placing the camera strap around the neck  
of an infant or child could result in  
strangulation.  
A
A
Do not remain in contact with the camera,  
battery, or charger for extended periods while  
the devices are on or in use  
Parts of the device become hot. Leaving  
the device in direct contact with the skin  
for extended periods may result in low-  
temperature burns.  
Do not use in the presence of flammable gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in the  
presence of flammable gas, as this could  
result in explosion or fire.  
A
Do not aim a flash at the operator of a motor  
vehicle  
A
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in accidents.  
x
   
Observe caution when using the flash  
The battery may be hot immediately  
after use or when the product has been  
used on battery power for an extended  
period. Before removing the battery  
turn the camera off and allow the  
battery to cool.  
Discontinue use immediately should  
you notice any changes in the battery,  
such as discoloration or deformation.  
A
Using the camera with the flash in close  
contact with the skin or other objects  
could cause burns.  
Using the flash close to the subject’s  
eyes could cause temporary visual  
impairment. Particular care should be  
observed when photographing infants,  
when the flash should be no less than  
one meter (39 in.) from the subject.  
Observe proper precautions when handling the  
charger  
Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or electric  
shock.  
Do not short the charger terminals.  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in overheating and damage to  
the charger.  
A
Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
A
A
Should the monitor break, care should be  
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass  
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes or mouth.  
Observe proper precautions when handling  
batteries  
Dust on or near the metal parts of the  
plug should be removed with a dry  
cloth. Continued use could result in fire.  
Do not go near the charger during  
thunderstorms. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in electric  
shock.  
Do not handle the plug or charger with  
wet hands. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in electric shock.  
Do not use with travel converters or  
adapters designed to convert from one  
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC  
inverters. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the product  
or cause overheating or fire.  
Batteries may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling  
batteries for use in this product:  
Use only batteries approved for use in  
this equipment.  
Do not short or disassemble the battery.  
Be sure the product is off before  
replacing the battery. If you are using  
an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.  
Do not attempt to insert the battery  
upside down or backwards.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or to  
excessive heat.  
Do not immerse in or expose to water.  
Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store the battery with  
metal objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
Batteries are prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage to  
the product, be sure to remove the  
battery when no charge remains.  
When the battery is not in use, attach  
the terminal cover and store in a cool,  
dry place.  
Use appropriate cables  
A
A
When connecting cables to the input and  
output jacks, use only the cables  
provided or sold by Nikon for the  
purpose to maintain compliance with  
product regulations.  
CD-ROMs  
CD-ROMs containing software or  
manuals should not be played back on  
audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs  
on an audio CD player could cause  
hearing loss or damage the equipment.  
xi  
 
Notices  
No part of the manuals included with this  
product may be reproduced, transmitted,  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or  
translated into any language in any form,  
by any means, without Nikon’s prior  
written permission.  
Nikon reserves the right to change the  
specifications of the hardware and  
software described in these manuals at  
any time and without prior notice.  
Nikon will not be held liable for any  
damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
While every effort has been made to  
ensure that the information in these  
manuals is accurate and complete, we  
would appreciate it were you to bring any  
errors or omissions to the attention of the  
Nikon representative in your area (address  
provided separately).  
Notice for Customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est  
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
CAUTION  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED  
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.  
This symbol indicates that this  
product is to be collected sepa-  
rately.  
This symbol on the battery indi-  
cates that the battery is to be col-  
lected separately.  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
This product is designated for separate  
collection at an appropriate collection  
point. Do not dispose of as household  
waste.  
For more information, contact the retailer  
or the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
All batteries, whether marked with this  
symbol or not, are designated for separate  
collection at an appropriate collection  
point. Do not dispose of as household  
waste.  
For more information, contact the retailer  
or the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
xii  
 
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
The Battery Charger  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY  
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper  
configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit is intended to be correctly  
oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found  
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
D5200  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in  
a particular installation. If this equipment  
does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to  
correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
The FCC requires the user be notified that any  
changes or modifications made to this device  
that are not expressly approved by Nikon  
Corporation may void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided by  
Nikon for your equipment. Using other  
interface cables may exceed the limits of  
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product  
may expose you to lead, a chemical known to  
the State of California to cause birth defects  
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands  
after handling.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,  
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
xiii  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced  
by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.  
Items prohibited by law from being copied or  
reproduced  
Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
The government has issued cautions on  
copies or reproductions of securities issued  
by private companies (shares, bills, checks,  
gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or  
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of  
necessary copies are to be provided for  
business use by a company. Also, do not  
copy or reproduce passports issued by the  
government, licenses issued by public  
agencies and private groups, ID cards, and  
tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,  
coins, securities, government bonds, or  
local government bonds, even if such  
copies or reproductions are stamped  
“Sample.”  
The copying or reproduction of paper  
money, coins, or securities which are  
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused postage  
stamps or post cards issued by the  
government is prohibited.  
Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of  
copyrighted creative works such as books,  
music, paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps,  
drawings, movies, and photographs is  
governed by national and international  
copyright laws. Do not use this product for  
the purpose of making illegal copies or to  
infringe copyright laws.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps  
issued by the government and of certified  
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices  
does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered  
from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in  
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s  
responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all  
data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it  
with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to  
also replace any pictures selected for preset manual (0 79). Care should be taken to avoid  
injury when physically destroying data storage devices.  
AVC Patent Portfolio License  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-  
COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC  
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND  
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC  
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE  
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com  
xiv  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.  
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash  
accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are  
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this  
electronic circuitry.  
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may  
void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not  
bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal  
operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.  
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital  
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety  
requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR  
NIKON WARRANTY.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the  
camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative  
once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that  
fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly  
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the  
camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is  
inspected or serviced.  
A Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the  
camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon  
will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
A Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and  
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:  
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to  
frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.  
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the  
following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/  
xv  
 
Introduction  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You  
may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the  
rest of the manual.  
The Camera Body  
14  
3 2 1  
24  
4
25  
5
6
7
8
15  
16  
26  
5
9
10  
11  
17  
27  
28  
12  
18  
19  
20  
21  
29  
30  
13  
22  
23  
1 Mode dial...................................3 10 Infrared receiver for ML-L3  
remote control (front) .......31  
Live view ............................. 93 11 AF-assist illuminator .............35  
21 Lens release button.............. 19  
22 Mirror .....................................216  
23 Lens mount.......................15, 41  
24 Accessory shoe cover.........204  
25 Accessory shoe (for optional  
flash units).........................204  
26 Stereo microphone.........2, 103  
27 Connector for external  
2 Live view switch  
Movie ................................. 101  
3 R (information) button... 7, 98  
4 I/E/# button  
Self-timer lamp ......................31  
Red-eye reduction lamp......47  
12 Body cap  
Release mode......................29 13 CPU contacts  
Self-timer ............................ 31  
Remote control.................. 31  
5 Eyelets for camera strap ...... 14  
6 E/N button  
14 Built-in flash............................45  
15 Speaker ............................. 2, 106  
16 Focal plane mark (E)...........41  
17 M/ Y button  
microphone........................104  
28 USB and A/V connector  
Connecting to a  
Exposure compensation... 66  
Adjusting aperture ........... 59  
Flash compensation......... 68  
Flash mode................... 46, 47  
Flash compensation..........68  
18 Connector cover  
computer.......................134  
Connecting to a printer  
..........................................137  
7
Shutter-release button...22, 23  
8 Power switch.............................2  
9 Movie-record button.......... 101  
Connecting to a TV.........145  
29 HDMI mini-pin connector  
..............................................146  
30 Accessory terminal .............210  
19 Fn button  
Using the Fn button  
...................................10, 165  
20 Mounting mark ......................15  
1
             
1
7
8 9  
10  
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
3
4
15  
16  
17  
18  
5
19  
20  
21  
22  
6
1 Viewfinder eyepiece......... 4, 32 9 A/L button  
18 Power connector cover for  
optional power connector  
..............................................212  
19 Battery-chamber cover latch  
......................................... 14, 18  
20 Battery-chamber cover  
......................................... 14, 18  
21 W/Q button  
Using the A (L) button  
................................... 39, 166  
Protecting photographs  
2 Rubber eyecup .......................32  
3 G button  
Menus..........................11, 148  
Restoring default settings  
............................................53  
from deletion................ 126  
10 Command dial ..........................8  
11 K button  
4
Infrared receiver for ML-L3  
Playback ............................ 118  
remote control (rear)......... 31  
12 J (OK) button....................... 12  
Viewing settings ..................6 13 Memory card slot cover  
Thumbnails.......................123  
Playback zoom out .........125  
Help ...................................... 11  
22 Battery latch .................... 14, 18  
5 Monitor  
Live view..............................93  
Full-frame playback ....... 118  
6 Tripod socket  
..........................................15, 18  
14 Multi selector ......................... 12  
15 Memory card access lamp  
..........................................22, 93  
16 O button  
Deleting pictures during  
playback......................... 127  
17 X button  
7 Diopter adjustment  
control...................................17  
8 P (information edit) button  
..................................................6  
Restoring default settings  
............................................53  
Playback zoom in............ 125  
D The Microphone and Speaker  
Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices. Failure to  
observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices.  
A The Power Switch  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn  
the camera on.  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn  
the camera off.  
2
       
The Mode Dial  
The camera offers a choice of the following shooting modes:  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Special Effects Modes  
Select these modes for full control over  
camera settings.  
Use special effects during shooting.  
% Night vision (0 112)  
P—Programmed auto (0 56)  
S —Shutter-priority auto (0 57)  
A—Aperture-priority auto (0 58)  
M—Manual (0 59)  
g Color sketch (0 112, 114)  
( Miniature effect (0 112, 115)  
3 Selective color (0 113, 116)  
1 Silhouette (0 113)  
2 High key (0 113)  
3 Low key (0 113)  
Auto Modes  
Select these modes for simple, point-and-  
shoot photography.  
i Auto (0 21)  
j Auto (flash off) (0 21)  
Scene Modes  
The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the scene selected with the mode dial.  
Match your selection to the scene being photographed.  
k Portrait (0 24)  
l Landscape (0 24)  
p Child (0 25)  
m Sports (0 25)  
n Close up (0 25)  
h Other scenes (0 26)  
A Scene Auto Selector (Live View)  
Selecting live view in i or j mode enables automatic scene selection (“scene auto  
selector”; 0 98) when autofocus is used.  
3
                                           
The Viewfinder  
1
2
3
7 8  
9
10  
11 12  
13 14 15  
21  
4
5
6
16  
17  
18 20  
19  
1
Framing grid (displayed when 10 Aperture (f-number)...... 58, 59 15 Flash-ready indicator ............23  
On is selected for Custom  
11 Low battery warning............ 20 16 Flexible program  
Setting d2) ........................ 161  
indicator................................56  
17 Exposure indicator.................59  
Exposure compensation  
12 Bracketing indicator ............. 83  
13 Number of exposures  
remaining ............................ 20  
Number of shots remaining  
before memory buffer  
2 Focus points............................38  
3 AF area brackets..............17, 21  
4 Low battery warning ............20  
5 Monochrome indicator  
display ...................................66  
Electronic rangefinder....... 159  
fills ......................................... 30 18 Flash compensation  
(displayed when the  
White balance recording  
indicator ............................... 79  
Exposure compensation value  
................................................ 65  
Flash compensation  
indicator................................67  
Monochrome Picture  
Control or a Picture Control  
based on Monochrome is  
selected) ...............................86  
6 “No memory card” indicator  
................................................15  
7 Focus indicator ................22, 40  
8 Autoexposure (AE) lock  
19 Exposure compensation  
indicator................................65  
20 Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator............................. 154  
21 Warning indicator............... 228  
value...................................... 67  
ISO sensitivity......................... 49  
Capture mode indicator ....136  
14 “K” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
indicator................................63  
9 Shutter speed ..................57, 59  
exposures) ........................... 20  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
D The Viewfinder  
The response time and brightness of the viewfinder display may vary with temperature.  
4
       
The Monitor  
The monitor can be angled and rotated as shown below.  
180°  
90°  
180°  
Normal use  
Fold the monitor against the camera face out.  
This position is recommended for normal  
photography.  
Low-angle shots  
Frame live view shots with the camera close to  
the ground.  
High-angle shots  
Frame live view shots while holding the camera  
over your head.  
Self-portraits  
Use for self-portraits in live view. The monitor  
shows a mirror image of what will appear in the  
final picture.  
D Using the Monitor  
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown. Do not use force. Failure to observe these  
precautions could damage the connection between the monitor and the camera body. To  
protect the monitor when the camera is not in use, fold it back face down against the camera  
body.  
A See Also  
See “Framing Photographs in the Monitor” for information on framing photographs in the  
monitor (0 93).  
5
         
The Information Display  
Camera settings can be viewed and adjusted in the information  
display. Press the P button once to view settings, and again to  
make changes to settings. Highlight items using the multi  
selector and press J to view options for the highlighted item.  
P button  
21 22 23 24 25 26 27  
1
6 7  
8
9 10 11 12 13 14  
2
3
15  
16  
17  
18  
4
5
20  
19  
34 33 32 31 30 29 28  
11 Flash control indicator....... 164 19 Exposure indicator ................ 59  
1 Shooting mode  
i auto/  
Flash compensation indicator  
for optional flash units ... 208  
12 Release mode......................... 29  
13 “Beep” indicator .................. 161  
14 Battery indicator ................... 20  
15 ISO sensitivity......................... 49  
ISO sensitivity  
display ......................... 49, 154 23 Bracketing increment........... 84  
Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator............................. 154  
16 ADL bracketing amount...... 84  
17 Number of exposures  
Exposure compensation  
indicator ............................... 66  
Bracketing progress  
j auto (flash off) ..............21  
Scene modes ......................24  
P, S, A, and M modes...........55  
Special effects mode...... 111  
2 Aperture (f-number) ......58, 59  
Aperture display .............58, 59  
3 Shutter speed ..................57, 59  
Shutter-speed display ...57, 59  
4 Bracketing indicator..............83  
5 Auto-area AF indicator .........36  
3D-tracking indicator............36  
Focus point..............................38  
6 Eye-Fi connection  
indicator............................. 176  
GPS connection indicator.. 176  
8 Exposure delay mode ........ 162 18 “K” (appears when memory  
9 Multiple exposure  
indicator................................75  
10 Print date indicator............. 163  
indicator ............................... 85  
20 Help icon ...............................228  
21 Image quality ......................... 42  
22 Image size ............................... 44  
24 HDR (High Dynamic  
Range)................................... 71  
25 Active D-Lighting .................. 69  
26 White balance ........................ 76  
27 ISO sensitivity......................... 49  
28 Exposure compensation...... 65  
29 Flash compensation ............. 67  
30 Flash mode ............................. 46  
31 Metering.................................. 62  
32 AF-area mode.................. 36, 95  
33 Focus mode ..................... 33, 94  
34 Picture Control....................... 86  
remaining ............................ 20  
White balance recording  
indicator............................... 79  
Capture mode indicator .... 136  
7
remains for over 1000  
exposures) ........................... 20  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
6
   
A Hiding Shooting Information  
To turn the monitor off, press the R button. Note that the monitor turns off automatically  
while the shutter-release button is pressed or if no operations are performed for about 8 s  
(for information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Auto off timers on page  
160). The information display can be restored by pressing the R button again.  
R button  
A See Also  
Information display  
Monitor off  
For information on choosing a design for the information display, see Info display format  
(0 169). For information on choosing whether information is displayed when the shutter-  
release button is pressed, see Auto info display (0 171). For information on the indicators  
displayed in live view, see page 97. For information on available settings, see page 221.  
7
 
The Command Dial  
The command dial can be used with other controls to adjust a variety of settings  
when shooting information is displayed in the monitor.  
M (Y) button  
E(N) button  
Mode dial  
Fn button  
Command dial  
Choose a scene (h mode;  
0 26).  
h mode  
Command dial  
Choose a special effect (q  
mode; 0 111).  
q mode  
Command dial  
Choose a combination of  
aperture and shutter speed  
(mode P; 0 56).  
Mode P  
Command dial  
Command dial  
Choose a shutter speed  
(mode S or M; 0 57, 59).  
Mode S or M  
8
   
Choose an aperture  
(mode A; 0 58).  
Mode A  
Command dial  
Choose an  
aperture  
(mode M;  
0 59).  
+
Mode M  
E (N) button Command dial  
Set exposure  
compensation  
(mode P, S, A, or  
%; 0 66).  
+
Mode P, S, A, or E (N) button Command dial  
%
Choose a flash mode (0 47).  
+
M (Y) button Command dial  
Adjust flash compensation (mode P, S, A, or M; 0 68).  
+
+
P, S, A, or M  
M (Y) button E (N) button Command dial  
9
 
The role of the Fn button can be selected using Custom  
Setting f1 (Assign Fn button; 0 165), allowing the  
following settings to be adjusted by rotating the  
command dial while keeping the Fn button pressed:  
+
Fn button  
Command dial  
Image quality/size (042)  
White balance (076)  
HDR (071)  
ISO sensitivity (049)  
Active D-Lighting (069)  
Auto bracketing (083)  
AF-area mode (036, 96)  
10  
   
Camera Menus: An Overview  
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can  
be accessed from the camera menus. To view the  
menus, press the G button.  
G button  
Tabs  
Choose from the following menus:  
D: Playback (0 148)  
C: Shooting (0 150)  
A: Custom Settings (0 155)  
B: Setup (0 167)  
N: Retouch (0 178)  
m/O: Recent settings or My Menu (defaults  
to Recent settings; 0 195)  
Slider shows position in current menu.  
Current settings are shown by icons.  
Menu options  
Options in current menu.  
d
If a d icon appears at the bottom left corner of the  
monitor, a description of the currently selected option or  
menu can be displayed by pressing the W (Q) button.  
Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the display. Press W (Q)  
again to return to the menus.  
W (Q) button  
11  
         
Using Camera Menus  
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.  
Move cursor up  
J button: select highlighted item  
Select highlighted item or  
Cancel and return to  
previous menu  
display sub-menu  
Move cursor down  
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.  
1 Display the menus.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
G button  
2 Highlight the icon for the current menu.  
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current  
menu.  
3 Select a menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.  
12  
 
4 Position the cursor in the selected menu.  
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected  
menu.  
5 Highlight a menu item.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.  
6 Display options.  
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu  
item.  
7 Highlight an option.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.  
8 Select the highlighted item.  
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit  
without making a selection, press the G  
button.  
Note the following:  
Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.  
While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some  
cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J.  
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway (0 23).  
13  
 
First Steps  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries or memory cards.  
1 Attach the strap.  
Attach the strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as shown below.  
2 Charge the battery.  
If a plug adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect the plug adapter  
as shown below at left, making sure the plug is fully inserted. Insert the battery  
and plug the charger in. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about 1 hour  
and 30 minutes.  
Battery charging  
Charging complete  
3 Insert the battery.  
Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep the  
orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks the battery in place  
when the battery is fully inserted.  
Battery latch  
14  
       
4 Insert a memory card (available separately).  
Check to be sure the card is in the correct orientation and then slide the card  
until it clicks into place.  
GB  
8
5 Attach a lens.  
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens or body cap  
is removed.  
Mounting mark (lens;  
indicated by white dot)  
Keeping marks (white dots) aligned, position lens on  
camera, then rotate until lens clicks into place.  
Mounting mark  
(camera)  
Mounting mark (lens)  
Autofocus is available with AF-S lenses. When using  
autofocus with a lens equipped with an A-M mode switch,  
slide the switch to A (if the lens has an M/A-M switch, select  
M/A for autofocus with manual override). For information  
on other lenses that can be used with the D5200, see page 199.  
If the lens has a vibration reduction (VR) switch, select ON  
to reduce the effects of vibration (0 238).  
15  
           
6 Open the monitor.  
Open the monitor as shown. Do not use force.  
7 Turn the camera on.  
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.  
8 Choose a language and set the camera  
clock.  
Move cursor up  
J button: select  
highlighted item  
Use the multi selector and J button to  
select a language and set the camera clock.  
Select highlighted  
item or display  
sub-menu  
Move cursor down  
q
r
w
t
e
Select language  
Select time zone  
Select date format  
Note: The language and  
date/time can be changed  
at any time using the  
Language and Time  
zone and date options in  
the setup menu (0 173).  
Select daylight saving  
time option  
Set time and date  
(note that the camera  
uses a 24-hour clock)  
16  
         
9 Focus the viewfinder.  
After removing the lens cap, rotate the diopter  
adjustment control until the AF area brackets are  
in sharp focus. When operating the control with  
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put  
your fingers or fingernails in your eye.  
AF area brackets  
A Adjusting Viewfinder Focus  
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select single-servo autofocus  
(AF-S; 0 33), single-point AF (c; 0 36), and the center focus point, and then frame a high-  
contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to  
focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control to bring the  
subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further  
adjusted using optional corrective lenses.  
D During Charging  
Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe this  
precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is  
complete when the battery is only partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to  
begin charging again.  
D Charging the Battery  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages x–xi and 218–220 of this manual. Charge  
the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the  
battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F; failure to observe  
this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be  
reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C/32 °F to 15 °C/  
59 °F and from 45 °C/113 °F to 60 °C/140 °F. The battery will not charge if its temperature is  
below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F). If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight  
times a second) during charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and  
then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease  
use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Do not attempt to charge a fully-charged battery. Failure to observe this precaution will  
result in reduced battery performance.  
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.  
17  
   
A Removing the Battery  
To remove the battery, turn the camera off and open the  
battery-chamber cover. Press the battery latch in the  
direction shown by the arrow to release the battery and then  
remove the battery by hand.  
A Formatting Memory Cards  
If this is the first time the memory card will be used in the  
camera or if the card has been formatted in another device,  
select Format memory card in the setup menu and follow  
the on-screen instructions to format the card (0 168). Note  
that this permanently deletes any data the card may contain.  
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to  
keep to a computer before proceeding.  
D Memory Cards  
Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards  
from the camera.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory  
cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source  
during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.  
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the  
camera or card.  
Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage  
the card.  
Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
Do not format memory cards in a computer.  
A Removing Memory Cards  
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off,  
turn the camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and  
press the card in to eject it (q). The card can then be  
GB  
8
removed by hand (w).  
A The Write Protect Switch  
SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to  
G B  
8
prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the  
“lock” position, the memory card can not be formatted and  
photos can not be deleted or recorded (a beep will sound if  
you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory  
card, slide the switch to the “write” position.  
Write-protect switch  
18  
       
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings  
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 200), lock aperture at the  
minimum setting (highest f-number).  
A Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging  
lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release  
button (q) while turning the lens clockwise (w). After  
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body  
cap.  
A The Camera Clock  
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock  
regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.  
A The Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is  
charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an  
optional EP-5A power connector and EH-5b AC adapter (0 212). Three days of charging will  
power the clock for about a month. If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed  
when the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset.  
Set the clock to the correct time and date.  
19  
     
Basic Photography  
Battery Level and Card Capacity  
Before shooting, check the battery level and number of exposures remaining.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
2 Check the battery level.  
Check the battery level in the information  
display (if the battery is low, a warning will also  
be displayed in the viewfinder). If the monitor is  
off, press the P button to view the information  
display; if the monitor does not turn on, the  
battery is exhausted and must be recharged.  
Information display Viewfinder  
Description  
Battery fully charged.  
L
K
Battery partially discharged.  
Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare battery or  
prepare to charge battery.  
H
d
Battery exhausted; shutter release disabled. Charge or  
(flashes) exchange battery.  
H
(flashes)  
d
3 Check the number of exposures remaining.  
The information display and viewfinder show the  
number of photographs that can be taken at  
current settings (values over 1000 are rounded  
down to the nearest hundred; e.g., values  
between 1200 and 1299 are shown as 1.2 K). If a  
warning is displayed stating that there is not  
enough memory for additional photographs,  
insert another memory card (0 15) or delete  
some photos (0 127).  
20  
         
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography  
(i and j Modes)  
This section describes how to take photographs in i and j modes,  
automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in which the majority of settings  
are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on. The information display will  
appear in the monitor.  
Mode dial  
2 Select i or j mode.  
To shoot where use of a flash is prohibited,  
photograph infants, or capture natural lighting  
under low light, select auto (flash off) mode by  
rotating the mode dial to j. Otherwise, rotate  
the dial to i (auto).  
3 Ready the camera.  
When framing photographs in the  
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your  
right hand and cradle the camera  
body or lens with your left. Keep your  
elbows propped lightly against your  
torso for support and place one foot  
half a pace ahead of the other to keep your upper body  
stable. When framing photographs in portrait (tall)  
orientation, hold the camera as shown at right.  
In j mode, shutter speeds slow when lighting is poor; use  
of a tripod is recommended.  
4 Frame the photograph.  
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the  
main subject in the AF area brackets.  
AF area brackets  
21  
       
5 Press the shutter-release button halfway.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to  
focus. The active focus point will be displayed. If  
the subject is poorly lit, the flash may pop up and  
the AF-assist illuminator may light.  
Focus point  
6 Check the indicators in the viewfinder.  
When the focus operation is complete, a beep  
will sound (a beep may not sound if the subject is  
moving) and the in-focus indicator (I) will  
appear in the viewfinder.  
In-focus indicator  
I
Description  
Subject in focus.  
Camera unable to focus using  
autofocus. See page 34.  
I (flashes)  
In-focus  
indicator  
Buffer  
capacity  
While the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway, the number of exposures that can be  
stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 30) will be  
displayed in the viewfinder.  
7 Shoot.  
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the  
rest of the way down to release the shutter and  
record the photograph. The memory card access  
lamp will light and the photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor for a few seconds (the  
photo will automatically clear from the display  
when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway). Do not eject the memory card or remove  
or disconnect the power source until the lamp has  
gone out and recording is complete.  
Memory card access  
lamp  
A Image Sensor Cleaning  
The camera vibrates the low-pass filter covering the image sensor to remove dust when the  
camera is turned on or off (0 214).  
22  
             
A The Shutter-Release Button  
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button  
the rest of the way down.  
Focus: press halfway  
Shoot: press all the way down  
A The Standby Timer  
The viewfinder and information display will turn off if no operations are performed for about  
eight seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button halfway to  
reactivate the display. The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can  
be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 160).  
Exposure meters on  
Exposure meters off  
Exposure meters on  
A The Built-in Flash  
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the  
built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway (0 45). If the flash is raised, photographs  
can only be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is displayed. If  
the flash-ready indicator is not displayed, the flash is charging;  
remove your finger briefly from the shutter-release button and try  
again.  
To save battery power when the flash is not in use, return it to its  
closed position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks  
into place.  
A Using a Zoom Lens  
Zoom in  
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a  
larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area  
visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths  
on the lens focal length scale to zoom in, shorter focal  
lengths to zoom out).  
Zoom ring  
Zoom out  
23  
             
Creative Photography (Scene Modes)  
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene mode  
automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making  
creative photography as simple as selecting a mode, framing a picture,  
and shooting as described on pages 21–23.  
The Mode Dial  
The following scenes can be selected with the mode  
dial:  
Mode dial  
kPortrait  
Use for portraits with soft, natural-looking  
skin tones. If the subject is far from the  
background or a telephoto lens is used,  
background details will be softened to  
lend the composition a sense of depth.  
lLandscape  
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight.  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off; use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blur when lighting is poor.  
24  
             
pChild  
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing  
and background details are vividly  
rendered, while skin tones remain soft and  
natural.  
mSports  
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for  
dynamic sports shots in which the main  
subject stands out clearly. The built-in  
flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.  
nClose up  
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects,  
and other small objects (a macro lens can  
be used to focus at very close ranges). Use  
of a tripod is recommended to prevent  
blur.  
25  
           
Other Scenes  
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial to h and rotating  
the command dial until the desired scene appears in the monitor.  
Mode dial  
Command dial  
Monitor  
oNight Portrait  
rNight Landscape  
sParty/Indoor  
Use for a natural balance between the  
main subject and the background in  
portraits taken under low light. Use of a  
tripod is recommended to prevent blur.  
Reduce noise and unnatural colors when  
photographing night landscapes,  
including street lighting and neon signs.  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off; use of a tripod is recommended  
to prevent blur.  
Capture the effects of indoor background  
lighting. Use for parties and other indoor  
scenes.  
26  
               
tBeach/Snow  
Capture the brightness of sunlit expanses  
of water, snow, or sand. The built-in flash  
and AF-assist illuminator turn off.  
uSunset  
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets  
and sunrises. The built-in flash and AF-  
assist illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
vDusk/Dawn  
Preserves the colors seen in the weak  
natural light before dawn or after sunset.  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off; use of a tripod is recommended  
to prevent blur when lighting is poor.  
wPet Portrait  
Use for portraits of active pets. The AF-  
assist illuminator turns off.  
27  
               
xCandlelight  
yBlossom  
zAutumn Colors  
0Food  
For photographs taken by candlelight.  
The built-in flash turns off; use of a tripod  
is recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in  
bloom, and other landscapes featuring  
expanses of blossoms. The built-in flash  
turns off; use of a tripod is recommended  
to prevent blur when lighting is poor.  
Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in  
autumn leaves. The built-in flash turns off;  
use of a tripod is recommended to prevent  
blur when lighting is poor.  
Use for vivid photographs of food. Use of  
a tripod is recommended to prevent blur;  
the built-in flash can also be used (0 45).  
28  
               
More on Photography (All Modes)  
Single-Frame, Continuous, Self-timer,  
Remote, and Quiet Release Modes  
Choose from the following release modes:  
Mode  
Description  
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed.  
8
Continuous L (continuous low speed): The camera takes photographs at about 3 frames per  
second (fps) while the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Continuous H (continuous high speed): The camera takes photographs at about 5 fps while  
the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Self-timer: Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake  
!
9
E
Delayed remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released 2 s after shutter-release button on optional  
ML-L3 (0 210) remote control is pressed (0 31).  
Quick-response remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released when shutter-release button on optional  
ML-L3 (0 210) remote control is pressed (0 31).  
"
#
Quiet shutter release: As for single frame, except that mirror does not click back into place  
while shutter-release button is fully pressed, allowing user to control timing of click  
made by mirror, which is also quieter than in single frame mode. Also, beep does not  
sound when camera focuses, keeping noise to a minimum in quiet surroundings.  
J
1 Press I (E/#).  
A list of release mode options will be  
displayed.  
I (E/#) button  
2 Choose a release mode.  
Highlight a release mode and press J to return  
to the information display. Photographs can be  
taken immediately.  
29  
                     
A The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to  
continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs  
can be taken in succession; note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the memory card access lamp  
will light (0 22). Depending on the battery level and the number of the images in the  
buffer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory  
card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera  
is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in  
the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer,  
the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.  
A Continuous Release Modes  
Continuous release modes can not be used with the built-in flash; rotate the mode dial to j  
(0 21) or turn the flash off (0 45–47). For information on the number of photographs that  
can be taken in a single burst, see page 241.  
A Buffer Size  
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the  
memory buffer at current settings is shown in the viewfinder  
exposure-count display while the shutter-release button is pressed. The illustration shows  
the display when space remains in the buffer for about 17 pictures.  
A The Shooting Menu  
The release mode can also be selected using the Release mode  
option in the shooting menu (0 150).  
30  
     
Self-Timer and Remote Control Modes  
The self-timer and optional ML-L3 remote control (0 210) allow the photographer to  
be at a distance from the camera when a photo is taken.  
1 Mount the camera on a tripod.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.  
2 Select a release mode.  
Select E (Self-timer), " (Delayed remote  
(ML-L3)), or # (Quick-response remote  
(ML-L3)) mode (0 29; note that if no  
operations are performed for about a  
minute after a remote control mode is  
selected, the camera will automatically  
I (E/#) button  
return to single frame, continuous, or quiet shutter-release mode).  
3 Frame the photograph.  
Remote control mode: Check focus by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.  
No photograph will be taken even if the button is pressed all the way down.  
4 Take the photograph.  
Self-timer mode: Press the shutter-release button  
halfway to focus, and then press the button the  
rest of the way down. The self-timer lamp will  
start to flash and a beep will begin to sound. Two  
seconds before the photo is taken, the lamp will  
stop flashing and the beeping will become more rapid. The shutter will be  
released ten seconds after the timer starts.  
Remote control mode: From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less,  
aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at either of the infrared  
receivers on the camera (0 1, 2) and press the ML-L3  
shutter-release button. In delayed remote mode, the self-  
timer lamp will light for about two seconds before the  
shutter is released. In quick-response remote mode, the self-  
timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released.  
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be taken if the camera is  
unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released.  
Turning the camera off cancels self-timer and remote control release modes and  
restores single frame, continuous, or quiet shutter-release mode.  
31  
           
Using Optional WR-R10 and WR-T10 Wireless Remote Controllers (0210)  
When a WR-T10 is used in combination with  
a WR-R10, the shutter-release button on the  
WR-T10 performs the same functions as the  
camera shutter-release button, allowing  
wireless remote control continuous and  
self-timer photography. For more  
information, see the manual provided with  
the WR-R10/WR-T10.  
WR-R10  
WR-T10  
D Before Using the ML-L3 Remote Control  
Before using the ML-L3 for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery-insulator sheet.  
D Remote Control Photography  
In quick-response (ML-L3) or delayed remote (ML-L3) release mode, the camera responds  
only to the shutter-release button on the ML-L3 remote control. Choose a different release  
mode when using WR-R10/WR-T10 wireless remote controllers.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
When taking photos without your eye to the  
viewfinder, remove the DK-20 rubber eyecup  
(q) and insert the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap  
as shown (w). This prevents light entering via  
the viewfinder interfering with exposure. Hold  
the camera firmly when removing the rubber  
eyecup.  
DK-20 rubber eyecup DK-5 eyepiece cap  
q
w
D Using the Built-in Flash  
Before taking a photograph with the flash in P, S, A, M, or 0 mode, press the M (Y) button to  
raise the flash and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 23). Shooting  
will be interrupted if the flash is raised while a remote control mode is in effect or after the  
self-timer has started. If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the ML-L3  
shutter-release button once the flash has charged. In auto, scene, and special effects modes  
in which the flash pops up automatically, the flash will begin charging when a remote  
control mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will automatically pop up and fire when  
required.  
In flash modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction lamp will light for  
about one second before the shutter is released in quick-response remote mode. In delayed  
remote mode, the self-timer lamp will light for two seconds, followed by the red-eye  
reduction lamp which lights for one second before the shutter is released.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer and the number of shots taken,  
see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 160). For information on choosing how long the  
camera will wait for a signal from the remote, see Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration  
(ML-L3); 0 161). For information on controlling the beeps that sound when the self-timer  
and remote control are used, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 161).  
32  
       
Focus  
This section describes the focus options available when photographs are framed in  
the viewfinder. Focus can be adjusted automatically or manually (see “Focus Mode,”  
below). The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 38)  
or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (0 38).  
Focus Mode  
Choose from the following focus modes. Note that AF-S and AF-C are available only in  
modes P, S, A, and M.  
Option  
Description  
Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus if subject is  
stationary, continuous-servo autofocus if subject is moving. Shutter can  
only be released if camera is able to focus.  
Auto-servo  
AF  
AF-A  
AF-S  
Single-servo For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is  
AF  
pressed halfway. Shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus.  
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. If subject moves, camera will engage  
predictive focus tracking to predict final distance to subject and adjust  
focus as necessary (0 34). At default settings, shutter can only be  
released if camera is able to focus (0 157).  
Continuous-  
servo AF  
AF-C  
MF Manual focus Focus manually (0 40).  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display focus mode options.  
Highlight the current focus mode in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a focus mode.  
Highlight a focus mode and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
33  
                   
A Predictive Focus Tracking  
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera will  
initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward the camera while the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to  
predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.  
D Continuous-servo Autofocus  
When Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection; 0 157) and the  
camera is in AF-C mode or continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera  
gives higher priority to focus response (has a wider focus range) than in AF-S mode, and the  
shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator is displayed.  
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may  
be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator  
(I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released  
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually (0 40) or use focus lock  
(0 38) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the  
photograph.  
There is little or no contrast  
between the subject and the  
background.  
The focus point contains  
areas of sharply contrasting  
brightness.  
Example: Subject is the same  
color as the background.  
The focus point contains  
objects at different distances  
from the camera.  
Example: Subject is half in  
the shade.  
Background objects appear  
larger than the subject.  
Example: A building is in the  
frame behind the subject.  
Example: Subject is inside a  
cage.  
The subject contains many  
The subject is dominated by  
fine details.  
regular geometric patterns.  
Example: A field of flowers or  
other subjects that are  
small or lack variation in  
brightness.  
Example: Blinds or a row of  
windows in a skyscraper.  
34  
       
D The AF-Assist Illuminator  
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light  
automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. The AF-assist illuminator will not  
light:  
AF-assist illuminator  
In live view or during movie recording  
During manual focus or if live view is off and continuous-servo  
autofocus is selected (AF-C selected for focus mode, or  
continuous-servo AF selected in AF-A focus mode)  
If the center focus point is not selected in c (single-point), d (dynamic-area), or f (3D-  
tracking) AF-area mode (0 36, 38)  
In shooting modes in which the AF-assist illuminator can not be used (0 221)  
If Off has been selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator; 0 158)  
The illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.); when using the  
illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 18–200 mm and remove the lens hood. The AF-  
assist illuminator will turn off automatically to protect the lamp after a period of continuous  
use. Normal function will resume after a brief pause. Note that the illuminator may become  
hot when used multiple times in quick succession.  
A See Also  
For information on the focus modes available in live view, see page 94. For information on  
using release priority in continuous-servo AF, see Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority  
selection, 0 157). Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 161) can be used to turn the beep speaker  
on or off.  
35  
 
AF-Area Mode  
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected. Note that d (dynamic-area)  
and f (3D-tracking) AF-area modes are not available when AF-S is selected for focus  
mode.  
Option  
Description  
User selects focus point using multi selector (0 38); camera focuses  
c
Single-point AF on subject in selected focus point only. Use with stationary  
subjects.  
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus point using multi  
Dynamic-area AF  
(9 points)  
selector (0 38), but camera will focus based on information from  
surrounding focus points if subject briefly leaves selected point.  
The number of focus points varies with the mode selected:  
J
9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose the  
photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving  
predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).  
Dynamic-area AF  
(21 points)  
K
L
21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that  
are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).  
39-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that  
are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder  
(e.g., birds).  
Dynamic-area AF  
(39 points)  
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus point using multi  
selector (0 38). If subject moves after camera has focused, camera  
uses 3D-tracking to select new focus point and keep focus locked on  
original subject while shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Use  
to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving  
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If subject leaves  
viewfinder, remove your finger from shutter-release button and  
recompose photograph with subject in selected focus point.  
Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point.  
f
e
3D-tracking  
Auto-area AF  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display AF-area mode options.  
Highlight the current AF-area mode in the  
information display and press J.  
36  
             
3 Choose an AF-area mode.  
Highlight an option and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
A AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other than P, S, A, or M are reset when  
another shooting mode is selected.  
A 3D-tracking  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the  
focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the  
desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background.  
A See Also  
For information on the AF-area modes available in live view, see page 95. For information on  
using the Fn button and the command dial to select an AF-area mode, see page 165.  
37  
 
Focus Point Selection  
In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AF-area modes other  
than e (Auto-area AF), you can choose from 39 focus points, making it possible to  
compose photographs with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.  
1 Choose an AF-area mode other than e  
(Auto-area AF; 0 36).  
2 Select the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to select the focus point in  
the viewfinder or information display while the  
exposure meters are on. Press J to select the  
center focus point.  
Focus point  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing in AF-A, AF-S, and AF-C  
focus modes (0 33), making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a  
focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus  
(0 34), focus lock can also be used to recompose the photograph after focusing on  
another object at the same distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most  
effective when an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode  
(0 36).  
1 Focus.  
Position the subject in the selected focus point  
and press the shutter-release button halfway to  
initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator  
(I) appears in the viewfinder.  
38  
           
2 Lock focus.  
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the shutter-release  
button pressed halfway (q), press the A (L)  
button (w) to lock both focus and exposure (an  
AE-L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder;  
0 63). Focus will remain locked while the A (L)  
button is pressed, even if you later remove your  
finger from the shutter-release button.  
Shutter-release button  
A (L) button  
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indicator  
appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter-  
release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the A (L) button (see  
above).  
3 Recompose the photograph and shoot.  
Focus will remain locked between shots if you  
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
(AF-S) or keep the A (L) button pressed,  
allowing several photographs in succession to be  
taken at the same focus setting.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus  
lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.  
A The A (L) Button  
Custom Setting f2 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button; 0 166) controls the behavior of the A (L)  
button.  
39  
     
Manual Focus  
Manual focus can be used when you are not using an AF-S or AF-I lens or when  
autofocus does not produce the desired results (0 34).  
A-M  
M/A-M  
1 Set the lens focus-mode switch.  
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M mode  
switch, slide the switch to M.  
mode switch mode switch  
2 Focus.  
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the  
image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder  
is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even  
when the image is not in focus.  
The Electronic Rangefinder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the  
viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the  
subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus point  
can be selected from any of the 39 focus points). After  
positioning the subject in the selected focus point, press the  
shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring  
until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with the subjects listed on  
page 34, the in-focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not  
in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.  
40  
             
A Selecting Manual Focus with the Camera  
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with manual override), manual  
focus can also be selected by setting the camera focus mode to MF  
(manual focus; 0 33). Focus can then be adjusted manually,  
regardless of the mode selected with the lens.  
A Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between your subject and the camera,  
measure from the focal plane mark on the camera body. The  
distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane  
is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).  
46.5mm  
Focal plane mark  
A The Exposure Indicator as Rangefinder  
If desired, the exposure indicator can be used to determine whether the focus point for  
manual focus is in front of or behind the subject (0 159).  
41  
     
Image Quality and Size  
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph  
occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger  
sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored  
on the memory card (0 241).  
Image Quality  
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).  
Option File type  
NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG fine  
Description  
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG  
image.  
NEF (RAW) + NEF/ Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality  
JPEG normal JPEG JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG basic  
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality  
JPEG image.  
Raw 14-bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory  
NEF card. Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after  
shooting.  
NEF (RAW)  
JPEG fine  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).  
JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).  
JPEG basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display image quality options.  
Highlight the current image quality in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a file type.  
Highlight an option and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
42  
               
A NEF (RAW) Images  
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.  
White balance bracketing (0 83), high dynamic range (HDR, 0 71), and print date (0 163)  
are not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.  
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2  
(available separately; 0 209) or ViewNX 2 (available on the supplied ViewNX 2 CD). JPEG  
copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0 186).  
A NEF (RAW) + JPEG  
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG  
image will be displayed. When photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF  
and JPEG images will be deleted.  
A The Shooting Menu  
Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option  
in the shooting menu (0 150).  
A The Fn Button  
Image quality and size can also be adjusted by rotating the command dial while keeping the  
Fn button pressed (0 165).  
43  
   
Image Size  
Choose a size for JPEG images:  
Image size  
Size (pixels)  
6000 × 4000  
4496 × 3000  
2992 × 2000  
Print size (cm/in.) *  
50.8 × 33.9/20 × 13.3  
38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10  
25.3 × 16.9/10 × 6.7  
#
$
%
Large  
Medium  
Small  
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels  
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display image size options.  
Highlight the current image size in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose an image size.  
Highlight an option and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
A The Shooting Menu  
Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the  
shooting menu (0 150).  
A The Fn Button  
Image quality and size can also be adjusted by rotating the command dial while keeping the  
Fn button pressed (0 165).  
44  
           
Using the Built-in Flash  
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit  
subjects.  
Using the Built-in Flash: i, k, p, n, o, s, w, and gModes  
1 Choose a flash mode (0 46).  
2 Take pictures.  
The flash will pop up as required when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and  
fire when a photograph is taken. If the flash does  
not pop up automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it  
by hand. Failure to observe this precaution could  
damage the flash.  
Using the Built-in Flash: P, S, A, M, and 0Modes  
1 Raise the flash.  
Press the M (Y) button to raise the flash.  
2 Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes  
only; 0 46).  
M (Y) button  
3 Take pictures.  
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.  
A Lowering the Built-in Flash  
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward  
until the latch clicks into place.  
45  
       
Flash Mode  
The flash modes available vary with shooting mode:  
i, k, p, n, s, w, g  
No Auto  
Njo Auto+red-eye reduction  
Flash off  
o
0
N
Fill flash  
Auto slow sync+  
red-eye reduction  
Njr  
j
Nr Auto slow sync  
j
Flash off  
P, A  
Fill flash  
Red-eye reduction  
Njp Slow sync+red-eye reduction  
S, M  
Fill flash  
N
N
Nj  
Nj  
Nq  
Red-eye reduction  
Rear-curtain sync  
Np  
Nt  
Slow sync  
Rear-curtain+slow sync  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display flash mode options.  
Highlight the current flash mode in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a flash mode.  
Highlight a mode and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
46  
           
A Flash Modes  
The flash modes listed on the previous page may combine one or more of the following  
settings, as shown by the flash mode icon:  
AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is backlit, flash pops up automatically  
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required.  
j (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. Red-eye reduction lamp lights before flash fires,  
reducing “red-eye.”  
j (off): Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is backlit.  
SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night  
or under low light. Use to include background lighting in portraits.  
REAR (rear-curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind  
moving light sources (below at right). If this icon is not displayed, flash will fire as the  
shutter opens (front-curtain sync; the effect this produces with moving light sources is  
shown below at left).  
Front-curtain sync  
Rear-curtain sync  
A Choosing a Flash Mode  
The flash mode can also be  
selected by rotating the  
command dial while keeping the  
M (Y) button pressed (0 9; in P,  
S, A, M, and 0 modes, raise the  
flash before using the M (Y)  
button to choose the flash  
mode).  
+
M (Y) button  
Command dial  
Information display  
A The Built-in Flash  
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash, see page 202. Remove  
lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not  
be used in the macro range of zoom lenses with a macro function.  
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for  
several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.  
47  
           
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash  
Shutter speed is restricted to the following ranges when the built-in flash is used:  
Mode  
Shutter speed  
1/2001/60 s  
1/2001/125 s  
1/200–1 s  
Mode  
S
M
Shutter speed  
1/200–30 s  
1/200–30 s, Bulb  
i, k, p, s, w, g, P, A  
n, 0  
o
Shutter speeds as slow as 30 s are available in slow sync, rear curtain + slow sync, and slow  
sync + red-eye reduction modes.  
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range  
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.  
Aperture at ISO equivalent of  
Approximate range  
100  
1.4  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
200  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
400  
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
800 1600 3200 6400  
m
ft  
4
5.6  
8
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
1.0–8.5  
0.7–6.0  
0.6–4.2  
0.6–3.0  
0.6–2.1  
0.6–1.5  
0.6–1.1  
0.6–0.7  
3ft 3in.–27ft 11n.  
2ft 4in.–19ft 8in.  
2ft–13ft 9in.  
2ft–9ft 10in.  
2ft–6ft 11in.  
2ft–4ft 11in.  
2ft–3ft 7in.  
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
11  
16  
22  
32  
11  
16  
22  
32  
2ft–2ft 4in.  
48  
   
ISO Sensitivity  
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the ISO sensitivity,  
the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller  
apertures, but the more likely the image is to be affected by noise (randomly-spaced  
bright pixels, fog, or lines; noise is particularly likely at settings between Hi 0.3  
(equivalent to ISO 8000) and Hi 2 (equivalent to ISO 25600)). Choosing Auto allows  
the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions.  
Mode  
ISO sensitivity  
i, j, %  
P, S, A, M  
Auto  
100–6400 in steps of 1/3 EV; Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1, Hi 2  
Other shooting modes Auto; 100–6400 in steps of 1/3 EV; Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1, Hi 2  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display ISO sensitivity options.  
Highlight the current ISO sensitivity in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose an ISO sensitivity.  
Highlight an option and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
49  
       
A Auto  
If the mode dial is rotated to P, S, A, or M after Auto is selected for ISO sensitivity in another  
mode, the ISO sensitivity last selected in P, S, A, or M mode will be restored.  
A The Shooting Menu  
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity  
settings option in the shooting menu (0 150).  
A See Also  
For information on enabling auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, or M modes, see page 154.  
For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at  
high ISO sensitivities, see page 153. For information on using the Fn button and the  
command dial to select ISO sensitivity, see page 165.  
50  
Interval Timer Photography  
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.  
D Before Shooting  
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view  
the results in the monitor. To ensure that shooting starts at the desired time, check that the  
camera clock is set correctly (0 173).  
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To  
ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged or use an  
optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5A power connector.  
1 Select Interval timer shooting.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Interval timer shooting in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Choose a starting time.  
Choose from the following starting triggers.  
To start shooting immediately, highlight Now  
and press 2. Shooting begins about three  
seconds after settings are completed;  
proceed to Step 3.  
To choose a starting time, highlight Start time  
and press 2 to display the start time  
options shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to  
highlight hours or minutes and press 1 or  
3 to change. Press 2 to continue.  
3 Choose the interval.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours, minutes, or  
seconds and press 1 or 3 to choose an  
interval longer than the slowest anticipated  
shutter speed. Press 2 to continue.  
51  
   
4 Choose the number of intervals.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight number of  
intervals (i.e., the number of times the  
camera shoots); press 1 or 3 to change.  
Press 2 to continue.  
5 Start shooting.  
Highlight On and press J (to return to the  
shooting menu without starting the interval  
timer, highlight Off and press J). The first  
series of shots will be taken at the specified  
starting time, or after about 3 s if Now was  
selected for Choose start time in Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected  
interval until all shots have been taken. Note that because shutter speed and  
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to  
shot, intervals may be skipped if the camera is still in the process of recording  
the previous interval. If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for  
example, if a shutter speed of “Bulb” is currently selected in shooting mode M  
or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber  
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap (0 32).  
A Other Settings  
Settings can not be adjusted during interval timer photography. Regardless of the release  
mode selected, the camera takes one photograph at each interval; in mode J, camera noise  
will be reduced. Bracketing (0 83), multiple exposure (0 73), and high dynamic range  
A Interrupting Interval Timer Photography  
To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the mode dial to a new  
setting. Returning the monitor to the storage position does not interrupt interval timer  
shooting.  
52  
Restoring Default Settings  
The camera settings listed below and on page 54 can be  
restored to default values by holding the G and P  
buttons down together for more than two seconds  
(these buttons are marked by a green dot). The  
information display turns off briefly while settings are  
reset.  
G button  
P button  
Settings Accessible from the Information Display  
Option  
Default  
0
Option  
Default  
0
Image quality  
JPEG normal 42 AF-area mode  
Image size  
Auto bracketing  
P, S, A, M  
HDR (high dynamic range)  
P, S, A, M  
Active D-Lighting  
P, S, A, M  
White balance 1  
P, S, A, M  
ISO sensitivity  
P, S, A, M  
k, l, p, m, n, o, r, s, t,  
u, v, w, x, y, z, 0, g, (,  
3, 1, 2, 3  
Picture Control settings  
P, S, A, M  
Large  
Off  
Viewfinder  
n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3  
Single-point AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
(39 points)  
m, w  
i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s,  
t, u, v, y, z, g, 3, P, S, A, Auto-area AF  
M
Live view/movie  
k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x,  
y, z  
m, r, w, %, g, 3, 1, 2,  
3, P, S, A, M  
n, 0  
Metering  
P, S, A, M  
Flash mode  
i, k, p, n, w, g  
o
Off  
Auto  
Auto  
100  
Face-priority AF  
Wide-area AF  
Normal-area AF  
Auto  
Matrix metering 62  
Unmodified 2 86  
Auto  
Auto slow sync  
Auto+red-eye  
reduction  
Fill flash  
Focus mode  
Viewfinder  
Shooting modes other  
than %  
Live view/movie  
s
AF-A  
AF-S  
P, S, A, M  
Flash compensation  
P, S, A, M  
Exposure compensation  
%, P, S, A, M  
Off  
Off  
1 Fine-tuning reset to zero.  
2 Current Picture Control only.  
53  
   
Other Settings  
Option  
Release mode  
m, w  
Other shooting modes  
Focus point *  
AE/AF lock hold  
Shooting modes other  
than i and j  
Flexible program  
P
Multiple exposure  
Multiple exposure mode  
P, S, A, M  
Default  
0
Option  
Special effects mode  
g
Default  
0
Continuous H  
Single frame  
Center  
Vividness  
Outlines  
(
0
0
Orientation  
Width  
3
Landscape  
Normal  
Off  
Off  
Color  
Off  
3
Color range  
Off  
* Focus point not displayed if e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode.  
54  
 
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Shutter Speed and Aperture  
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter  
speed and aperture:  
Mode  
Description  
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure.  
Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which  
there is little time to adjust camera settings.  
Programmed auto  
(0 56)  
P
S
Shutter-priority auto User chooses shutter speed; camera selects aperture for best  
(0 57)  
results. Use to freeze or blur motion.  
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best  
results. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and  
background into focus.  
Aperture-priority auto  
(0 58)  
A
User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed  
to “Bulb” or “Time” for long time-exposures.  
Manual (0 59)  
M
D Lens Aperture Rings  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 200), lock the aperture ring at the  
minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture  
ring.  
A Shutter Speed and Aperture  
The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and  
aperture. Fast shutter speeds and large apertures freeze moving objects and soften  
background details, while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and  
bring out background details.  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Fast shutter speed  
Slow shutter speed  
(1 s)  
Large aperture (f/5.6) Small aperture (f/22)  
(Remember, the higher the f-number, the  
smaller the aperture.)  
(1/1600 s)  
55  
                     
Mode P (Programmed Auto)  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and  
other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed  
and aperture. To take photographs in programmed auto:  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.  
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
A Flexible Program  
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed  
and aperture can be selected by rotating the  
command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate the dial to  
the right for large apertures (low f-numbers) that  
blur background details or fast shutter speeds that  
“freeze” motion. Rotate the dial to the left for small  
apertures (high f-numbers) that increase depth of  
field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All  
Command dial  
combinations produce the same exposure. While flexible program is in effect, a U (R)  
indicator appears in the viewfinder and information display. To restore default shutter speed  
and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed,  
choose another mode, or turn the camera off.  
A See Also  
See page 223 for information on the built-in exposure program.  
56  
         
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera  
automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. Use slow  
shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects, fast shutter speeds to  
“freeze” motion.  
Fast shutter speed (1/1600 s)  
Slow shutter speed (1 s)  
Mode dial  
To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:  
1 Rotate the mode dial to S.  
2 Choose a shutter speed.  
Shutter speed is shown in the viewfinder  
and information display. Rotate the  
command dial to choose the desired shutter  
speed from values between 30 s and 1/4000 s.  
Command dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
57  
     
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically  
selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. Large apertures  
(low f-numbers) reduce depth of field, blurring objects behind and in front of the  
main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of field, bringing out  
details in the background and foreground. Short field depths are generally used in  
portraits to blur background details, long field depths in landscape photographs to  
bring the foreground and background into focus.  
Large aperture (f/5.6)  
Small aperture (f/22)  
Mode dial  
To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:  
1 Rotate the mode dial to A.  
2 Choose an aperture.  
Aperture is shown in the viewfinder and  
information display. Rotate the command  
dial to choose the desired aperture from  
values between the minimum and  
maximum for the lens.  
Command dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
58  
       
Mode M (Manual)  
In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. To take photographs  
in manual mode:  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
2 Choose aperture and shutter speed.  
Checking the exposure indicator (see below), adjust shutter speed and  
aperture. Shutter speed is selected by rotating the command dial: choose from  
values between 30 s and 1/4000 s or select “Bulb” or “Time” to hold the shutter  
open indefinitely for a long time-exposure (0 60). Aperture is selected by  
rotating the command dial while keeping the E (N) button pressed: choose  
from values between the minimum and maximum for the lens. Shutter speed  
and aperture are shown in the viewfinder and information display.  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Command  
E (N) button Command  
dial  
dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
A The Exposure Indicator  
If a CPU lens is attached (0 199) and a shutter speed other than “Bulb” or “Time” is selected,  
the exposure indicator in the viewfinder and information display shows whether the  
photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings (the display varies  
depending on the options selected for Custom Settings b1, EV steps for exposure cntrl and  
f5, Reverse indicators; 0 159, 166). If the limits of the exposure metering or live view  
exposure control system are exceeded, the indicator will flash.  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by 1/3 EV  
Overexposed by over 2 EV  
59  
             
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)  
Select the following shutter speeds for long time-  
exposures of moving lights, the stars, night  
scenery, or fireworks.  
Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while  
the shutter-release button is held down. To  
prevent blur, use a tripod, optional WR-R10 and  
WR-T10 wireless remote controllers, or an  
optional MC-DC2 remote cord (0 210). The  
shutter-release buttons on the WR-T10 and  
MC-DC2 perform the same role as the camera  
shutter-release button.  
Length of exposure: 35 s  
Aperture: f/25  
Time (&): Requires an optional ML-L3 remote  
control (0 210). Start the exposure by pressing the ML-L3 shutter-release button.  
The shutter remains open for 30 minutes or until the button is pressed a second  
time.  
1 Ready the camera.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To prevent  
light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber  
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap (0 32).  
To prevent loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged  
EN-EL14 battery or an optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5A power connector.  
Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be  
present in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for Long exposure NR  
in the shooting menu (0 153).  
Mode dial  
2 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
3 Choose a shutter speed.  
Rotate the command dial to choose a  
shutter speed of Bulb (A). For a shutter  
speed of “Time” (&), select a remote control  
release mode (0 31) after choosing the  
shutter speed.  
Command dial  
60  
         
4 Open the shutter.  
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional  
remote cord all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until  
the exposure is complete.  
Time: Press the ML-L3 shutter-release button all the way down.  
5 Close the shutter.  
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.  
Time: Press the ML-L3 shutter-release button all the way down. Shooting ends  
automatically after 30 minutes.  
61  
Exposure  
Metering  
Choose how the camera sets exposure in P, S, A, and M modes (in other modes, the  
camera selects the metering method automatically).  
Method  
Description  
Produces natural results in most situations. Camera uses 2016-pixel RGB sensor  
to meter a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone  
distribution, color, composition, and, with type G or D lenses (0 200), distance  
information (3D color matrix metering II; with other CPU lenses, the camera uses  
color matrix metering II; which does not include 3D distance information).  
Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area. Classic  
Matrix  
metering  
L
M
N
Center-  
weighted meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an exposure factor  
metering (filter factor) over 1×.  
Camera meters current focus point; use to meter off-center subjects (if e Auto-  
area AF is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder photography as  
described on page 36, camera will meter center focus point). Ensures that  
subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much brighter or  
Spot  
metering  
darker.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display metering options.  
Highlight the current metering method in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a metering method.  
Highlight an option and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
62  
                   
Autoexposure Lock  
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using M (Center-weighted  
metering) and N (Spot metering) to meter exposure; note that autoexposure lock is  
not available in i or j mode.  
1 Meter exposure.  
Position the subject in the center of the frame  
(center-weighted metering) or the selected focus  
point (spot metering) and press the shutter-  
release button halfway to set focus and meter  
exposure. Check that the in-focus indicator (I)  
appears in the viewfinder.  
Shutter-release  
2 Lock exposure.  
button  
With the shutter-release button pressed halfway (q) and  
the subject positioned in the focus point, press the A (L)  
button (w) to lock exposure.  
A Autoexposure Lock  
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release  
button AE-L; 0 159), exposure will lock when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. For information on  
changing the role of the AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f2  
(Assign AE-L/AF-L button; 0 166).  
A (L) button  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will  
appear in the viewfinder.  
3 Recompose the photograph.  
Keeping the A (L) button pressed, recompose  
the photograph and shoot.  
63  
       
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the  
metered value for exposure:  
Mode  
Setting  
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 56)  
Shutter speed  
Programmed auto  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto  
Aperture  
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.  
64  
Exposure Compensation  
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the  
camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with  
M (Center-weighted metering) or N (Spot metering) (0 62). Choose from values  
between –5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV. In  
general, positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it  
darker.  
–1 EV  
No exposure compensation  
+1 EV  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display exposure compensation options.  
Highlight exposure compensation in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a value.  
Highlight a value and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0. Exposure  
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off, but is reset if you select  
another mode after choosing %.  
65  
   
A The E (N) Button  
Exposure compensation can also be  
set by rotating the command dial  
while keeping the E (N) button  
pressed. The selected value is shown  
in the viewfinder and information  
display.  
E (N) button Command dial  
–0.3 EV  
+2 EV  
A Mode M  
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and  
aperture do not change.  
A Using a Flash  
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash  
level.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure  
compensation, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 159). For  
information on automatically varying exposure over a series of shots, see page 83.  
66  
 
Flash Compensation  
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the  
camera, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.  
Choose from values between –3 EV (darker) and +1 EV (brighter) in increments of  
1/3 EV; in general, positive values make the subject brighter while negative values  
make it darker.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display flash compensation options.  
Highlight flash compensation in the information  
display and press J.  
3 Choose a value.  
Highlight a value and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0. Flash  
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.  
67  
   
A The M (Y) and E (N) Buttons  
Flash compensation can also be set by  
rotating the command dial while  
pressing the M(Y) and E(N) buttons.  
The selected value is shown in the  
viewfinder and information display.  
M (Y) button  
E (N) button  
Command dial  
–0.3 EV  
+1 EV  
A Optional Flash Units  
Flash compensation is also available with optional flash units that support the Nikon  
Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 205). The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and  
SB-600 also allow flash compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit. The flash  
compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to the flash compensation  
selected with the camera.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for flash compensation, see  
Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 159).  
68  
 
Preserving Detail in Highlights and  
Shadows  
Active D-Lighting  
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs  
with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when  
photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking  
pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with  
L (Matrix metering; 0 62).  
Active D-Lighting: ! Off  
Active D-Lighting: Y Auto  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display Active D-Lighting options.  
Highlight Active D-Lighting in the information  
display and press J.  
3 Choose an option.  
Highlight YAuto, Z Extra high, P High,  
Q Normal, R Low, or ! Off and press J. If  
YAuto is selected, the camera will  
automatically adjust Active D-Lighting  
according to shooting conditions. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway.  
69  
     
D Active D-Lighting  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken with  
Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting  
can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above. A setting of Y Auto is equivalent to  
Q Normal in mode M or when center-weighted or spot metering is used.  
A “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”  
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to  
optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0 180)  
brightens shadows in images after shooting.  
A The Shooting Menu  
Active D-Lighting can also be adjusted using the Active D-Lighting  
option in the shooting menu (0 150).  
A See Also  
For information on automatically varying Active D-Lighting over a series of shots, see page  
83. For information on using the Fn button and command dial to select an Active  
D-Lighting option, see page 165.  
70  
 
High Dynamic Range (HDR)  
High Dynamic Range (HDR) combines two exposures to form a single image that  
captures a wide range of tones from shadows to highlights, even with high-contrast  
subjects. HDR is most effective when used with L (Matrix metering) (0 62; with  
other metering methods, a setting of v Auto is equivalent to T Normal). It can  
not be used to record NEF (RAW) images. The flash can not be used while HDR is in  
effect.  
+
First exposure (darker)  
Second exposure (brighter)  
Combined HDR image  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display HDR (High Dynamic Range)  
options.  
Highlight HDR (High Dynamic Range) in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose an option.  
Highlight v Auto, 2 Extra high, S High,  
T Normal, U Low, or 6 Off and press J. If  
v Auto is selected, the camera will  
automatically adjust HDR according to shooting  
conditions. To return to shooting mode, press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
u will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
71  
     
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
The camera takes two exposures when the  
shutter-release button is pressed all the way  
down. “l u” will flash in the viewfinder  
while the images are combined; no photographs  
can be taken until recording is complete. HDR  
turns off automatically after the photograph is  
taken; to turn off HDR before shooting, rotate the  
mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.  
D Framing HDR Photographs  
The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may not be achieved if the  
camera or subject move during shooting. Depending on the scene, the effect many not be  
visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos may appear around dark  
objects. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.  
A The Shooting Menu  
HDR (High Dynamic Range) can also be adjusted using the HDR  
(High Dynamic Range) option in the shooting menu (0 150).  
A See Also  
For information on using the Fn button and command dial to select an HDR option, see page  
72  
 
Multiple Exposure  
Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three exposures in a single  
photograph. Multiple exposures produce colors noticeably superior to those in  
software-generated photographic overlays created from existing images.  
Creating a Multiple Exposure  
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view before proceeding.  
Note that at default settings, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be  
recorded automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s.  
A Extended Recording Times  
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the meter-off delay Custom  
Setting c2 (Auto off timers) > Standby timer (0 160). The maximum interval between  
exposures is about 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c2. If no  
operations are performed for approximately 30 s after the monitor has turned off during  
playback or menu operations, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created  
from the exposures that have been recorded to that point.  
1 Select Multiple exposure.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Multiple exposure in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Enable multiple exposure mode.  
Highlight Multiple exposure mode and  
press 2.  
The options shown at right will be displayed.  
Highlight On and press J.  
73  
     
3 Choose the number of shots.  
Highlight Number of shots and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of  
exposures that will be combined to form a  
single photograph and press J.  
4 Choose the amount of gain.  
Highlight Auto gain and press 2.  
The following options will be displayed.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
On: Gain is adjusted according to number  
of exposures actually recorded (gain for  
each exposure is set to 1/2 for two  
exposures, 1/3 for three exposures).  
Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure. Recommended  
if background is dark.  
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
In continuous high-speed and continuous  
low-speed release modes (0 29), the camera  
records all exposures in a single burst;  
shooting will pause after each multiple exposure. In self-timer mode, the  
camera will automatically record the number of exposures selected in Step 3,  
regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number  
of shots (0 160). In other release modes, one photograph will be taken each  
time the shutter-release button is pressed; continue shooting until all  
exposures have been recorded.  
74  
 
Interrupting Multiple Exposures  
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of  
exposures have been taken, select Off for Multiple exposure >  
Multiple exposure mode in the shooting menu. A multiple  
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been  
recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted  
to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that  
shooting will end automatically if:  
The mode dial is rotated to a setting other than P, S, A, or M  
A two-button reset is performed (0 53)  
The camera is turned off  
The battery is exhausted  
One of the exposures is deleted  
A The Multiple Exposure Indicator  
Progress is shown by the multiple exposure indicator in the  
information display.  
$ (on): Camera ready to record new multiple exposure. Press the  
shutter-release button all the way down to begin shooting.  
$ (flashes): Shooting in progress.  
D Multiple Exposures  
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure.  
The information listed in the playback photo information display (including metering,  
exposure, shooting mode, focal length, date of recording and camera orientation) is for the  
first shot in the multiple exposure.  
75  
 
White Balance  
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source.  
Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; in P, S, A, and M modes,  
other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source:  
Option  
v Auto  
Description  
Automatic white balance adjustment. Recommended in most situations.  
Incandescent Use under incandescent lighting.  
J
I
Fluorescent  
Use with the light sources listed on page 77.  
H
N
Direct sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
Flash  
Use with the flash.  
Cloudy  
Shade  
Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
G
M
L
Preset manual Measure white balance or copy white balance from existing photo (0 79).  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display white balance options.  
Highlight the current white balance setting in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a white balance option.  
Highlight an option and press J. To return to  
shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
76  
                     
A The Shooting Menu  
White balance can be selected using the White balance option in  
the shooting menu (0 150), which also can be used to fine-tune  
white balance (0 78) or measure a value for preset white balance  
The I Fluorescent option in the White balance menu can be used  
to select the light source from the bulb types shown at right.  
A Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color  
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to  
the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–  
5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent  
light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature  
appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the following  
color temperatures (all figures are approximate):  
I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K  
J (incandescent)/  
H (direct sunlight): 5200 K  
N (flash): 5400 K  
I (warm-white fluorescent): 3000 K  
I (white fluorescent): 3700 K  
I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K  
I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K  
G (cloudy): 6000 K  
I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K  
I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K  
M (shade): 8000 K  
A The Fn Button  
For information on automatically varying white balance settings over a series of shots, see  
page 83. For information on using the Fn button and the command dial to select a white  
77  
       
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the  
light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is  
fine-tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu.  
1 Display white balance options.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2 to display white balance  
options.  
G button  
2 Select a white balance option.  
Highlight an option other than Preset  
manual and press 2 (if Fluorescent is  
selected, highlight a lighting type and press  
2). The fine-tuning options shown at right  
will be displayed. Fine-tuning is not  
available with Preset manual white balance.  
Coordinates  
Adjustment  
Increase green  
3 Fine-tune white balance.  
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white  
balance.  
Increase  
blue  
Increase  
amber  
Increase magenta  
A White Balance Fine-Tuning  
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the  
cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected will  
make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.  
4 Save changes and exit.  
Press J.  
78  
   
Preset Manual  
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting  
under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two  
methods are available for setting preset white balance:  
Method  
Measure  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photo  
and white balance measured by camera (see below).  
Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card (0 82).  
Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance  
1 Light a reference object.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the  
final photograph.  
2 Display white balance options.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2 to display white balance  
options. Highlight Preset manual and press  
2.  
G button  
3 Select Measure.  
Highlight Measure and press 2. The menu  
shown at right will be displayed; highlight  
Yes and press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed before the camera enters preset  
measurement mode.  
When the camera is ready to measure white  
balance, a flashing D (L) will appear in  
the viewfinder and information display.  
79  
       
4 Measure white balance.  
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the  
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder  
and press the shutter-release button all the  
way down. No photograph will be recorded;  
white balance can be measured accurately  
even when the camera is not in focus.  
5 Check the results.  
If the camera was able to measure a value for  
white balance, the message shown at right  
will be displayed and a will flash in the  
viewfinder for about eight seconds before  
the camera returns to shooting mode. To  
return to shooting mode immediately, press  
the shutter-release button halfway.  
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the  
camera may be unable to measure white  
balance. A message will appear in the  
information display and a flashing b a  
will appear in the viewfinder for about  
eight seconds. Return to Step 4 and  
measure white balance again.  
80  
 
D Measuring Preset White Balance  
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode  
will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 160). The default  
setting is eight seconds.  
D Preset White Balance  
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time; the existing value will  
be replaced when a new value is measured. Note that exposure is automatically increased  
by 1 EV when measuring white balance; when shooting in mode M, adjust exposure so that  
the exposure indicator shows 0 (0 59).  
A Other Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance  
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset white balance in the  
information display (0 76), press J for a few seconds. If white balance has been assigned to  
the Fn button (0 165), white balance preset measurement mode can be activated by  
keeping the Fn button pressed for a few seconds after selecting preset white balance with  
the Fn button and command dial.  
A Studio Settings  
In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object when measuring  
preset white balance.  
81  
Copying White Balance from a Photograph  
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the  
memory card.  
1 Select Preset manual.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2 to display white balance  
options. Highlight Preset manual and press  
2.  
G button  
2 Select Use photo.  
Highlight Use photo and press 2.  
3 Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and press 2 (to skip  
the remaining steps and use the image last  
selected for preset white balance, select This  
image).  
4 Choose a folder.  
Highlight the folder containing the source  
image and press 2.  
5 Highlight the source image.  
To view the highlighted image full frame,  
press and hold the X button.  
6 Copy white balance.  
Press J to set preset white balance to the  
white balance value for the highlighted  
photograph.  
82  
   
Bracketing  
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting (ADL)  
settings slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations  
in which it is difficult to set exposure or white balance and there is not time to check  
results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for  
the same subject.  
Option  
Description  
Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.  
AE  
k
bracketing  
Shot 1: unmodified  
Shot 2: exposure reduced Shot 3: exposure increased  
WB  
Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates three images, each with a  
m
!
bracketing different white balance. Not available with image qualities of NEF (RAW).  
ADL Take one photo with Active D-Lighting off, and another at the current Active  
bracketing D-Lighting setting.  
1 Choose a bracketing option.  
After pressing G to display the menus,  
highlight Custom Setting e2 (Auto  
bracketing set) and press 2.  
G button  
The options shown at right will be displayed.  
Highlight the desired bracketing type and  
press J.  
2 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
83  
         
3 Display bracketing options.  
Highlight the current bracketing setting and  
press J.  
4 Select a bracketing increment.  
Highlight a bracketing increment and press J.  
Choose from values between 0.3 and 2 EV (AE  
bracketing) or 1 to 3 (WB bracketing), or select  
ADL (ADL bracketing).  
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
AE bracketing: The camera will vary exposure with  
each shot. The first shot will be taken at the  
value currently selected for exposure compensation. The bracketing increment  
will be subtracted from the current value in the second shot and added in the  
third shot, “bracketing” the current value. The modified values are reflected in  
the values shown for shutter speed and aperture.  
WB bracketing: Each shot is processed to create three copies, one at the current  
white balance setting, one with increased amber, and one with increased blue.  
If there is not enough space available on the  
memory card to record three images, the  
exposure-count display in the viewfinder will  
flash. Shooting can begin when a new memory  
card is inserted.  
ADL bracketing: The first shot after bracketing is activated is taken with Active  
D-Lighting off, the second at the current Active D-Lighting setting (0 69; if  
Active D-Lighting is off, the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set  
to Auto).  
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed release modes, shooting will  
pause after each bracketing cycle. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the  
bracketing sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in  
the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
84  
 
A The Bracketing Progress Indicator  
During AE bracketing, progress is shown by the bracketing  
indicator in the information display:  
v : Camera ready to take first shot.  
w : Camera ready to take second shot.  
x : Camera ready to take third shot.  
During ADL bracketing, the setting that will be used for the next  
shot is underlined in the information display.  
A Disabling Bracketing  
To disable bracketing and resume normal shooting, select OFF in Step 4 on the previous  
page. To cancel bracketing before all frames have been recorded, rotate the mode dial to a  
setting other than P, S, A, or M.  
A Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture  
(mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled in  
modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure  
when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first  
use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and  
then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed.  
A See Also  
For information on using the Fn button and the command dial to choose the bracketing  
85  
 
Picture Controls  
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing  
settings, including sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue, among  
compatible devices and software.  
Selecting a Picture Control  
The camera offers six Picture Controls. In P, S, A, and M modes, you can choose a  
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene (in other modes, the camera  
selects a Picture Control automatically).  
Option  
Description  
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most  
situations.  
Q Standard  
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will later  
be extensively processed or retouched.  
R Neutral  
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for photographs  
that emphasize primary colors.  
S Vivid  
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.  
e Portrait  
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.  
f Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in  
the monitor, press the P button. Press the  
P button again to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Display Picture Control options.  
Highlight the current Picture Control and press  
J.  
3 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight a Picture Control and press J. To  
return to the information display, press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
86  
                   
Modifying Picture Controls  
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 90) can be modified to suit the scene or  
the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick  
adjust, or make manual adjustments to individual settings.  
1 Display the Picture Control menu.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Set Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight the desired Picture Control and  
press 2.  
3 Adjust settings.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting  
and press 4 or 2 to choose a value (0 88).  
Repeat this step until all settings have been  
adjusted, or select Quick adjust to choose a  
preset combination of settings. Default  
settings can be restored by pressing the O  
button.  
4 Save changes and exit.  
Press J.  
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls  
Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are  
indicated by an asterisk (“*”).  
87  
       
Picture Control Settings  
Option  
Description  
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect  
of the selected Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).  
For example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid.  
Not available with Neutral, Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.  
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening  
Quick adjust  
Sharpening automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from values between  
0 (no sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the sharpening).  
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene, or  
choose from values between –3 and +3 (choose lower values to prevent  
Contrast  
highlights in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,  
higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast  
subjects).  
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced brightness. Does not  
affect exposure.  
Brightness  
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically  
Saturation according to the type of scene, or choose from values between –3 and +3  
(lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it).  
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make reds more purple,  
Hue  
blues more green, and greens more yellow, positive values (up to +3) to  
make reds more orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.  
Filter  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. Choose  
effects  
from Off, yellow, orange, red, and green (0 89).  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-and-  
white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green,  
Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue, Red Purple (0 89).  
Toning  
D “A” (Auto)  
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure and the position of  
the subject in the frame.  
A Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls  
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset Picture Controls.  
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using  
the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menu (0 90). Both preset and custom  
Picture Controls can be selected in the information display or using the Set Picture Control  
option in the shooting menu. In addition, custom Picture Controls can be saved to a  
memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and compatible software  
88  
                   
A The Picture Control Grid  
Pressing the X button in Step 3 displays a Picture Control grid  
showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control  
in relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed  
when Monochrome is selected). Release the X button to return to  
the Picture Control menu.  
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation  
are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines appear  
parallel to the axes of the grid.  
A Previous Settings  
The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu  
indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference  
when adjusting settings.  
A Custom Picture Controls  
The options available with custom picture controls are the same as those on which the  
custom picture control was based.  
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)  
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.  
The following filter effects are available:  
Option  
Yellow  
Description  
Y
O
R
G
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in  
Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red  
more contrast than orange.  
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.  
Red  
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those  
produced by physical glass filters.  
A Toning (Monochrome Only)  
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays saturation options.  
Press 4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available  
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.  
89  
       
Creating Custom Picture Controls  
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom  
Picture Controls.  
1 Select Manage Picture Control.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Manage Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select Save/edit.  
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.  
3 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight an existing Picture Control and  
press 2, or press J to proceed to step 5 to  
save a copy of the highlighted Picture  
Control without further modification.  
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.  
See page 88 for more information. To  
abandon any changes and start over from  
default settings, press the O button. Press J  
when settings are complete.  
5 Select a destination.  
Highlight a destination for the custom  
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and  
press 2.  
90  
     
6 Name the Picture Control.  
The text-entry dialog shown at right will be  
displayed. By default, new Picture Controls  
are named by adding a two-digit number  
(assigned automatically) to the name of the  
existing Picture Control; to use the default  
Keyboard  
area  
Name area  
name, proceed to Step 7. To move the cursor in the name area, rotate the  
command dial. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the  
multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press  
J. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button.  
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any  
characters after the nineteenth will be deleted.  
7 Save changes and exit.  
Press X to save changes and exit. The new  
Picture Control will appear in the Picture  
Control list.  
A Manage Picture Control > Rename  
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time  
using the Rename option in the Manage Picture  
Control menu.  
A Manage Picture Control > Delete  
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control  
menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture  
Controls when they are no longer needed.  
A The Original Picture Control Icon  
The original preset Picture Control on which the  
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon  
in the top right corner of the edit display.  
Original Picture Control icon  
91  
 
Sharing Custom Picture Controls  
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with  
ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card  
and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can  
be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and  
then deleted when no longer needed.  
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the  
memory card, or to delete custom Picture Controls  
from the memory card, highlight Load/Save in the  
Manage Picture Control menu and press 2. The  
following options will be displayed:  
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the  
memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1  
through C-9 on the camera and name them as  
desired.  
Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture  
Controls from the memory card. The confirmation  
dialog shown at right will be displayed before a  
Picture Control is deleted; to delete the selected  
Picture Control, highlight Yes and press J.  
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1  
through C-9) from the camera to a selected  
destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.  
A Saving Custom Picture Controls  
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The  
memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The preset  
Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card, renamed,  
or deleted.  
92  
 
Live View  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor  
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.  
1 Rotate the live view switch.  
The mirror will be raised and the view through  
the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor.  
The subject will no longer be visible in the  
viewfinder.  
Live view switch  
2 Position the focus point.  
Position the focus point over your subject as  
described on page 96.  
Focus point  
3 Focus.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway. The  
focus point will flash green while the camera  
focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus  
point will be displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point  
will flash red (note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point flashes  
red; check focus in the monitor before shooting). Except in i and j modes,  
exposure can be locked by pressing the A (L) button.  
4 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down. The monitor turns off and the  
memory card access lamp lights during  
recording. Do not remove the battery or memory  
card or unplug the optional AC adapter until  
Memory card access lamp  
recording is complete. When shooting is  
complete, the photograph will be displayed in the monitor for a few seconds or  
until the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. The camera will then return  
to live view mode. To exit, rotate the live view switch.  
93  
               
Focusing in Live View  
Follow the steps below to choose focus and AF-area modes and position the focus  
point.  
Choosing a Focus Mode  
The following focus modes are available in live view (note that full-time–servo AF is  
not available in g and ( modes):  
Option  
Description  
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway.  
AF-S Single-servo AF  
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously until shutter-  
AF-F Full-time-servo AF release button is pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
MF Manual focus  
Focus manually (0 100).  
1 Place the cursor in the information  
display.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
2 Display focus options.  
Highlight the current focus mode in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a focus option.  
Highlight an option and press J. To return to live  
view, press P.  
94  
               
Choosing an AF-Area Mode  
In modes other than i, j, and (, the following AF-area modes can be selected in  
live view (note that subject-tracking AF is not available in %, g, and 3 modes):  
Option  
Description  
The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait  
subjects. Use for portraits.  
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait  
subjects. Use the multi selector to select the focus point.  
Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod is  
recommended.  
Face-priority AF  
6
7
8
Wide-area AF  
Normal-area AF  
9 Subject-tracking AF Track a selected subject as it moves through the frame.  
1 Place the cursor in the information  
display.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the  
information display.  
P button  
2 Display AF-area modes.  
Highlight the current AF-area mode in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose an AF-area mode.  
Highlight an option and press J. To return to live  
view, press P.  
95  
             
Choosing the Focus Point  
The method for selecting the focus point for autofocus  
varies with the option selected for AF-area mode  
(0 95).  
6 (face-priority AF): A double yellow border will be  
displayed when the camera detects a portrait subject  
(if multiple faces, up to a maximum of 35, are detected,  
the camera will focus on the closest subject; to choose  
a different subject, use the multi selector). If the  
camera can no longer detect the subject (because, for  
example, the subject has turned to face away from the  
camera), the border will no longer be displayed.  
Focus point  
7/8 (wide- and normal-area AF): Use the multi selector to  
move the focus point anywhere in the frame, or press  
J to position the focus point in the center of the  
frame.  
Focus point  
9 (subject-tracking AF): Position the focus point over  
your subject and press J. The focus point will track  
the selected subject as it moves through the frame. To  
end focus tracking, press J a second time.  
Focus point  
D Subject Tracking  
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the frame or are  
obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too  
large, too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the background.  
96  
         
The Live View Display  
y u  
q
w
e
r
i
o
!
!
t
!
:
Item  
Description  
0
Shooting mode The mode currently selected with the mode dial.  
q
“No movie” icon Indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
w
e
The amount of time remaining before live view ends  
Time remaining  
automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.  
Microphone  
sensitivity  
Microphone sensitivity for movie recording.  
r
t
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed in red if level is too  
high; adjust microphone sensitivity accordingly.  
The current focus mode.  
Sound level  
Focus mode  
AF-area mode  
Time remaining  
(movie mode)  
Movie frame  
size  
y
u
The current AF-area mode.  
The recording time remaining in movie mode.  
The frame size of movies recorded in movie mode.  
i
o
Manual movie  
settings  
indicator  
Displayed when On is selected for Manual movie settings in  
mode M.  
!
The current focus point. The display varies with the option  
selected for AF-area mode (0 95).  
Indicates whether the photograph would be under- or over-  
exposed at current settings (mode M only).  
Focus point  
!
!
Exposure  
indicator  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
97  
             
A Live View/Movie Recording Display Options  
Press the R button to cycle through display options as shown below.  
Circled areas indicate edges of movie frame crop  
Show photo  
indicators  
Show movie  
indicators (0 101) *  
Hide indicators*  
Framing grid*  
* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie recording when frame sizes  
other than 640 × 424 are selected for Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate in the  
shooting menu (0 103; the area outside the movie frame crop is grayed out when movie  
indicators are displayed).  
A Automatic Scene Selection (Scene Auto Selector)  
If live view is selected in i or j mode, the camera will automatically analyze the subject and  
select the appropriate shooting mode when autofocus is enabled. The selected mode is  
shown in the monitor (0 97).  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Close up  
Human portrait subjects  
Landscapes and cityscapes  
Subjects close to the camera  
c
d
e
f
Z
b
Night portrait Portrait subjects framed against a dark background  
Auto  
Auto (flash off)  
Subjects suited to i or j mode or that do not fall into the categories  
listed above  
A Exposure  
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live  
view is not used. Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display, producing  
photographs with exposure close to what is seen in the monitor. In P, S, A, and % modes,  
exposure can be adjusted by 5 EV in increments of 1/3 EV by rotating the command dial  
while keeping the E (N) button pressed (0 65). Note that the effects of values over +3 EV or  
under –3 EV can not be previewed in the monitor.  
98  
     
A HDMI  
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the camera monitor will remain on  
and the video device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports HDMI-  
CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the setup menu (0 147) before  
shooting in live view.  
D Shooting in Live View Mode  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure, remove the  
rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap before  
shooting (0 32).  
Although they will not appear in the final picture, distortion may be visible in the monitor if  
the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright  
light sources may leave after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright  
spots may also appear. Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent,  
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using Flicker reduction (0 172), although  
they may still be visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting in  
live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to  
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed or when the monitor is closed (closing  
the monitor does not end live view on televisions or other external displays).  
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live  
view when the camera is not in use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal  
circuits may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be  
displayed in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this  
does not indicate a malfunction):  
The ambient temperature is high  
The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies  
The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods  
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view, wait for the internal circuits to  
cool and then try again.  
D The Count Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (0 97; the timer turns  
red 5 s before the auto off timer expires (0 160) or if live view is about to end to protect the  
internal circuits). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately  
when live view is selected. Note that although the count down does not appear in the  
information display or during playback, live view will still end automatically when the timer  
expires.  
99  
     
D Using Autofocus in Live View  
Autofocus is slower in live view and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera  
focuses. The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations:  
The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame  
The subject lacks contrast  
The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the  
subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in  
brightness  
Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar  
lighting  
A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used  
The subject appears smaller than the focus point  
The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows  
in a skyscraper)  
The subject is moving  
Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable  
to focus.  
A Manual Focus  
To focus in manual focus mode (0 40), rotate the  
lens focus ring until the subject is in focus.  
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 9 ×  
for precise focus, press the X button. While the view  
through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window  
will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner  
of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to  
areas of the frame not visible in the monitor  
(available only if 7 (Wide-area AF) or 8 (Normal-  
area AF) is selected for AF-area mode), or press  
X button  
Navigation window  
W (Q) to zoom out.  
100  
     
Recording and Viewing Movies  
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.  
1 Rotate the live view switch.  
The mirror is raised and the view through the lens is  
displayed in the monitor instead of the viewfinder.  
D The 0 Icon  
A 0 icon (0 97) indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
Live view switch  
A Before Recording  
Set aperture before recording in mode A or M.  
2 Focus.  
Frame the opening shot and focus as described in Steps 2  
and 3 of “Framing Photographs in the Monitor” (0 93; see  
also “Focusing in Live View” on pages 0 94–96). Note that  
the number of subjects that can be detected in face-  
priority AF drops during movie recording.  
3 Start recording.  
Press the movie-record button to start recording. A  
recording indicator and the time available are displayed in  
the monitor. Except in i and j modes, exposure can be  
locked by pressing the A (L) button (0 63) or (in modes  
P, S, A, and %) altered by up to 3 EV in steps of 1/3 EV by  
pressing the E (N) button and rotating the command dial  
(0 65; note that depending on the brightness of the  
subject, changes to exposure may have no visible effect).  
Movie-record button  
Recording indicator  
Time remaining  
101  
               
4 End recording.  
Press the movie-record button again to end recording. Recording will end  
automatically when the maximum length is reached, the memory card is full,  
another mode is selected, the lens is removed, or the monitor is closed (closing  
the monitor does not end recording on televisions or other external displays).  
A Taking Photographs During Movie Recording  
To end movie recording, take a photograph, and exit to live view, press the shutter-release  
button all the way down and hold it in this position until the shutter is released.  
A Maximum Length  
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum recording times, see  
page 103); note that depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end before this  
length is reached (0 211).  
D Recording Movies  
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under  
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an  
object moves at high speed through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced using  
Flicker reduction; 0 172). Bright light sources may leave after-images when the camera is  
panned. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright  
bands may appear in some areas of the frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a flash or  
other bright, momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at  
the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in  
damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the microphone during  
recording. Note that the built-in microphone may record lens noise during autofocus and  
vibration reduction.  
Flash lighting can not be used during movie recording.  
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live  
view when the camera is not in use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal  
circuits may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be  
displayed in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this  
does not indicate a malfunction):  
The ambient temperature is high  
The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies  
The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods  
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view or movie recording, wait for the  
internal circuits to cool and then try again.  
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected. Shutter speed and ISO  
sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On is selected for Manual movie settings  
102  
     
Movie Settings  
Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu to adjust the following settings.  
Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following options. The  
frame rate depends on the option currently selected for Video mode in the setup  
menu (0 172):  
Frame size/frame rate  
Movie quality  
Maximum bit rate (Mbps)  
(high quality/Normal)  
Maximum length  
(high quality/Normal) 4  
Frame size (pixels)  
Frame rate 1  
L/t  
M/u  
60i 2  
50i 3  
N/r 1920 × 1080  
O/s  
P/k  
30p 2  
25p 3  
24p  
24/12  
20 min./29 min. 59 s  
Q/l  
R/o  
S/n  
T/p  
60p 2  
50p 3  
30p 2  
25p 3  
1280 × 720  
29 min. 59 s/  
29 min. 59 s  
640 × 424  
8/5  
1 Listed value. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and  
23.976 fps respectively.  
2 Available when NTSC is selected for Video mode (0 172).  
3 Available when PAL is selected for Video mode.  
4 Movies recorded in miniature effect mode are up to three minutes long when played back.  
Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional ME-1 stereo microphones (0 104, 210)  
on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust  
sensitivity automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select  
microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and choose a  
sensitivity.  
A The Movie Crop  
The movie crop can be viewed during live view by pressing the R button to select the “show  
movie indicators, hide indicators, or “framing grid” display (0 98). A smaller crop (shown  
by the illustration below at left) is used for movies with a Frame size/frame rate of 1920 ×  
1080 60i or 50i; during shooting, this crop is enlarged to fill the monitor as shown below at  
right.  
1920 × 1080 60i/50i crop  
Recording in progress  
103  
           
Manual movie settings: Choose On to allow manual  
adjustments to shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when the  
camera is in mode M. Shutter speed can be set to values as  
fast as 1/4000 s; the slowest speed available varies with the  
frame rate: 1/30 s for frame rates of 24p, 25p, and 30p, 1/50 s for  
50i or 50p, and 1/60 s for 60i or 60p. ISO sensitivity can be set  
to values between ISO 200 and Hi 2 (0 49). If shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are  
not in these ranges when live view starts, they will automatically be set to  
supported values, and remain at these values when live view ends. Note that ISO  
sensitivity is fixed at the value selected; the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity  
automatically when On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO  
sensitivity control in the shooting menu (0 154).  
1 Select Movie settings.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Movie settings in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Choose movie options.  
Highlight the desired item and press 2, then  
highlight an option and press J.  
A Using an External Microphone  
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to reduce noise caused by lens vibration  
being recorded during autofocus.  
D The Count-Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (0 97). Depending  
on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when movie recording begins.  
Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view will still end  
automatically when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming  
movie recording.  
104  
         
A HDMI and Other Video Devices  
When the camera is connected to a video device, the device will  
display the view through the camera lens. If the device  
supports HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control  
option in the setup menu (0 147) before shooting in live view.  
If 1920 × 1080 60i, 1920 × 1080 50i, 1280 × 720 60p, or 1280  
× 720 50p is selected for Frame size/frame rate, the monitor  
will turn off when the camera is connected to an HDMI video device.  
A See Also  
For information on the indicators displayed in live view, see page 97. For information on  
choosing focus and AF-area modes, see page 94. See page 100 for information on focusing  
in live view.  
105  
 
Viewing Movies  
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 118). Press J to start  
playback.  
1 icon  
Length  
Current position/total length  
Volume  
Movie progress bar  
Guide  
The following operations can be performed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Pause  
Pause playback.  
Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind/  
advance.  
Play  
Speed increases with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×;  
keep pressed to skip to beginning or end of movie (first frame is  
indicated by h in top right corner of monitor, last frame by i).  
If playback is paused, movie rewinds or advances one frame at  
a time; hold for continuous rewind or advance.  
Advance/  
rewind  
Skip 10 s  
Rotate the command dial to skip ahead or back 10 s.  
Adjust volume  
Edit movie  
Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.  
X/W (Q)  
A (L) To edit movie, press A (L) while movie is paused (0 107).  
Return to full-  
frame playback  
/K Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.  
Exittoshooting  
mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway. Monitor will turn off;  
photographs can be taken immediately.  
A The 2 Icon  
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback if the movie was  
recorded without sound.  
106  
       
Editing Movies  
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills.  
Option  
Description  
Create a copy from which the opening or closing footage has  
been removed.  
f Choose start/end point  
g Save selected frame  
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.  
To prevent unexpected loss of power during editing, check the battery level before  
proceeding.  
Trimming Movies  
To create trimmed copies of movies:  
1 Display a movie full frame.  
Press the K button to display pictures full  
frame in the monitor and press 4 and 2 to  
scroll through pictures until the movie you  
wish to edit is displayed.  
K button  
2 Choose a starting or end point.  
Play the movie back as described on page  
106, pressing J to start and resume  
playback and 3 to pause. Your approximate  
position in the movie can be ascertained  
from the movie progress bar.  
Movie progress bar  
3 Display movie edit options.  
Press the A (L) button to display movie  
edit options.  
A (L) button  
107  
           
4 Select Choose start/end point.  
Highlight Choose start/end point and press  
2.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed;  
choose whether the current frame will be  
the starting or end point of the copy and  
press J.  
5 Delete frames.  
If the desired frame is not currently  
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or  
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate  
the command dial). To switch the current  
selection from start point (w) to end point (x)  
or vice versa, press A (L).  
A (L) button  
Once you have selected the start point and/  
or end point, press 1. All frames before the  
selected start point and after the selected  
end point will be removed from the copy.  
6 Save the copy.  
Highlight one of the following and press J:  
Save as new file: Save the copy to a new file.  
Overwrite existing file: Replace the original  
movie file with the edited copy.  
Cancel: Return to Step 5.  
Preview: Preview the copy.  
Except in the photo information “image only” page (0 119), edited copies are  
indicated by a f icon in full-frame playback.  
108  
D Trimming Movies  
Movies must be at least two seconds long. If a copy can not be created at the current  
playback position, the current position will be displayed in red in Step 5 and no copy will be  
created. The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory  
card.  
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.  
A The Retouch Menu  
Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie option  
in the retouch menu (0 178).  
109  
Saving Selected Frames  
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:  
1 View the movie and choose a frame.  
Play the movie back as described on page  
106; your approximate position in the movie  
can be ascertained from the movie progress  
bar. Pause the movie at the frame you  
intend to copy.  
2 Display movie edit options.  
Press the A (L) button to display movie  
edit options.  
A (L) button  
3 Choose Save selected frame.  
Highlight Save selected frame and press J.  
4 Create a still copy.  
Press 1 to create a still copy of the current  
frame.  
5 Save the copy.  
Highlight Yes and press J to create a fine-  
quality (0 42) JPEG copy of the selected  
frame. Except in the photo information  
“image only” page (0 119), movie stills are  
indicated by a f icon in full-frame playback.  
A Save Selected Frame  
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched. JPEG  
movie stills lack some categories of photo information (0 119).  
110  
       
Special Effects  
Special effects can be used when recording images.  
Shooting with Special Effects  
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial to q and rotating  
the command dial until the desired option appears in the monitor.  
Mode dial  
Command dial  
Monitor  
A NEF (RAW)  
If NEF (RAW)+JPEG is selected for image quality in %, g, (, or 3 mode, only the JPEG images  
will be recorded (0 42). If NEF (RAW) is selected, fine-quality JPEG photographs will be  
recorded instead of NEF (RAW) images.  
A The 1 Icon  
If a 1 icon is displayed in g or ( mode, no pictures will be taken while the shutter-release  
button is pressed in continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed release modes.  
A The Retouch Menu  
The Color sketch (0 189), Miniature effect (0 191), and Selective color (0 192) options in  
the retouch menu can be used to apply these effects to existing pictures.  
111  
       
%Night Vision  
Use under conditions of darkness to  
record monochrome images at high ISO  
sensitivities (with some noise in the form  
of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or  
lines). Autofocus is available in live view  
only; manual focus can be used if the  
camera is unable to focus. The built-in  
flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off; use  
of a tripod is recommended to reduce blur.  
gColor Sketch  
The camera detects and colors outlines for  
a color sketch effect. Movies shot in this  
mode play back like a slide show made up  
of a series of stills. The effect can be  
chosen during live view (0 114); note that  
the display refresh rate drops when live  
view is in effect and that the frame rate  
drops in continuous release modes.  
Autofocus is not available during movie  
recording.  
(Miniature Effect  
Distant subjects appear as miniatures.  
Miniature effect movies play back at high  
speed, compressing 30 to 45 minutes of  
footage shot at 1920 × 1080/30p into a  
movie that plays back in about three  
minutes. The effect can be chosen during  
live view (0 115); note that the display  
refresh rate drops when live view is in  
effect and that the frame rate drops in  
continuous release modes. Sound is not  
recorded with movies; autofocus is not  
available during movie recording. The  
built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn  
off; use of a tripod is recommended when  
lighting is poor.  
112  
           
3Selective Color  
1Silhouette  
2High Key  
All colors other than the selected colors  
are recorded in black and white. The effect  
can be chosen during live view (0 116).  
The built-in flash turns off; use of a tripod  
is recommended when lighting is poor.  
Silhouette subjects against bright  
backgrounds. The built-in flash turns off;  
use of a tripod is recommended when  
lighting is poor.  
Use with bright scenes to create bright  
images that seem filled with light. The  
built-in flash turns off.  
3Low Key  
Use with dark scenes to create dark,  
somber images with prominent  
highlights. The built-in flash turns off; use  
of a tripod is recommended when lighting  
is poor.  
113  
               
Options Available in Live View  
gColor Sketch  
1 Select live view.  
Rotate the live view switch to raise the mirror and display  
the view through the lens in the monitor.  
Live view switch  
2 Adjust options.  
Press J to display the options shown at right  
(note that the options temporarily clear from the  
display during autofocus). Press 1 or 3 to  
highlight Vividness or Outlines and press 4 or  
2 to change. Vividness can be increased to make  
colors more saturated, or decreased for a washed-out, monochromatic effect,  
while outlines can be made thicker or thinner. Increasing the thickness of the  
lines also makes colors more saturated. Press J to exit when settings are  
complete. To exit live view, rotate the live view switch. The selected settings  
will continue in effect and will apply to photographs taken using the  
viewfinder.  
114  
     
(Miniature Effect  
1 Select live view.  
Rotate the live view switch to raise the mirror and display  
the view through the lens in the monitor.  
Live view switch  
2 Position the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to position the focus point  
in the area that will be in focus and then press the  
shutter-release button halfway to focus (note  
that the options temporarily clear from the  
display during autofocus). To temporarily clear  
miniature effect options from the display and enlarge the view in the monitor  
for precise focus, press X. Press W to restore the miniature effect display.  
3 Display options.  
Press J to display miniature effect options.  
4 Adjust options.  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the orientation of the area  
that will be in focus and press 1 or 3 to adjust its  
width.  
5 Return to the live view display.  
Press J to return to live view. To exit live view, rotate the live view switch. The  
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to photographs taken  
using the viewfinder.  
115  
   
3Selective Color  
1 Select live view.  
Rotate the live view switch to raise the mirror and display  
the view through the lens in the monitor.  
Live view switch  
2 Display options.  
Press J to display selective color options.  
Selected color  
3 Select a color.  
Frame an object in the white square in the center  
of the display and press 1 to choose the color of  
the object as one that will remain in the final  
image (the camera may have difficulty detecting  
unsaturated colors; choose a saturated color). To  
zoom in on the center of the display for more  
precise color selection, press X. Press W to zoom out.  
Color range  
4 Choose the color range.  
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of  
similar hues that will be included in the final  
image. Choose from values between 1 and 7;  
note that higher values may include hues from  
other colors.  
5 Select additional colors.  
To select additional colors, rotate the command  
dial to highlight another of the three color boxes  
at the top of the display and repeat Steps 3 and 4  
to select another color. Repeat for a third color if  
desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press  
O (To remove all colors, press and hold O. A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; select Yes).  
116  
   
6 Return to the live view display.  
Press J to return to live view. During shooting, only objects of the selected  
hues will be recorded in color; all others will be recorded in black-and-white. To  
exit live view, rotate the live view switch. The selected settings will continue in  
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the viewfinder.  
117  
 
Playback and Deletion  
Full-Frame Playback  
To play photographs back, press the K button.  
The most recent photograph will be displayed in  
the monitor.  
K button  
To  
Use  
Description  
View additional  
photographs  
Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view  
photographs in reverse order.  
View additional  
photo info  
Change photo info displayed (0 119).  
See page 123 for more information on the thumbnail  
display.  
View thumbnails  
W (Q)  
X
Zoom in on  
photograph  
See page 125 for more information on playback zoom.  
Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to  
delete photo.  
Delete images  
O
Change protect  
status  
To protect image, or to remove protection from protected  
image, press A (L) button (0 126).  
A (L)  
Return to  
shooting mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway. Monitor will turn off;  
photographs can be taken immediately.  
Create retouched copy of current photograph (0 178). If  
current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a  
movie, pressing J starts movie playback (0 106).  
Retouch photo or  
play movie  
118  
       
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.  
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that “image  
only, shooting data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only  
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback display options (0 149).  
GPS data are only displayed if a GPS unit was used when the photo was taken.  
1/ 12  
NIKON D5200  
1/ 12  
LATITUDE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
E
º
35 36. 371'  
LONGITUDE  
º
139 43. 696'  
35m  
ALTITUDE  
TIME(UTC)  
15/04/2012  
01 15 29  
1
250 F11  
+
1. 0  
100  
35mm  
:
:
1. 3  
AUTO  
100 5200  
A
6,  
M
1
_
_
D
DS  
C
0001. JP  
G
NORMAL  
100  
D
5200  
D
S
C
0001. JP  
G
AL  
15  
/
04  
/2012 10 02 27  
600N0Ox4RM000  
N
I
KON  
D5200  
:
:
:
:
15 04 2012 10 02 27  
/
/
6000x4000  
1/12  
File information  
None (image only)  
Overview  
GPS data  
1/12  
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
TR SP  
D
AP  
1
250 F11  
E
MXP.  
M
O
D
E
, I S  
O
H
100  
1m. m3  
F
ONCAL LENG  
T
35  
5.  
LE  
S
S
18 55  
3.  
5
6
On  
A
F
V
R
A
V
R
FL  
A
H
M TYPE  
Bu i l t i n  
SYNC  
,
ODE  
,
+
.
1
TTL-BL  
0
Highlights  
N
I
KO  
N
D5200  
1/12  
N I KON D5200  
1
/
12  
Highlights  
RGB histogram  
Shooting data  
File Information  
1 2  
3
Protect status........................................................... 126  
Retouch indicator................................................... 179  
Frame number/total number of images  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1/12  
File name................................................................... 241  
Image quality..............................................................42  
Image size ....................................................................44  
Time of recording............................................ 16, 173  
Date of recording ............................................ 16, 173  
Folder name ............................................................. 151  
4
5
_
100  
D
5200  
D
S
C
0001. JP  
G
AL  
15  
/
04  
/
2012 10 02 27  
600N0Ox4RM000  
9
:
:
8
7
6
Highlights *  
Protect status........................................................... 126  
Retouch indicator................................................... 179  
Frame number/total number of images  
Image highlights  
1
2
3
4
1 2  
3
1/12  
4
Highlights  
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed).  
119  
       
RGB Histogram  
Retouch indicator ...................................................179  
Protect status ...........................................................126  
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
White balance ............................................................ 76  
White balance fine-tuning ................................. 78  
Preset manual......................................................... 79  
1
2
3
Camera name  
4
5
Histogram (RGB channel). In all histograms,  
horizontal axis gives pixel brightness, vertical  
axis number of pixels.  
4
N I KON D5200  
1
/
12  
Histogram (red channel)  
6
7
8
9
Histogram (green channel)  
Histogram (blue channel)  
Frame number/total number of images  
A Playback Zoom  
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is  
displayed, press X. Use the X and W (Q) buttons to zoom  
in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The  
histogram will be updated to show only the data for the  
portion of the image visible in the monitor.  
A Histograms  
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in  
imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:  
If the image contains objects with a wide range of  
brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively  
even.  
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the  
left.  
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to  
the right.  
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while  
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can  
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to  
see photographs in the monitor.  
120  
   
Shooting Data  
Shooting mode ..................................21, 24, 55, 111  
ISO sensitivity 1 .......................................................... 49  
Exposure compensation........................................ 65  
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
TR SP  
D
AP  
1 250 F11  
MXP.  
M
O
D
E
, I S  
O
H
100  
3
4
E
Focal length..............................................................203  
Lens data  
1. 3  
5
F
OCAL LE  
N
GT  
35mm  
6
LE  
S
18 55  
3. 5 5. 6  
7
A
FN  
VR  
A
V
R
O
n
.
8
Focus mode ......................................................... 33, 94  
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 2 ..........................238  
Flash type .........................................................164, 204  
Commander mode 3  
FL  
A
S
HM TYPE  
Bu i l t i n  
9
SYNC  
,
ODE  
10  
11  
+
,
TTL-BL  
1
0
9
N
N
N
I
I
I
KO  
N
D5200  
12  
1/12  
13  
Flash mode ................................................................. 46  
10  
11  
Flash control.............................................................164  
Flash compensation ................................................ 67  
Camera name  
:
:
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
HITE B  
A
L
A
N
C
E
A
UTO, A6,  
M1  
WO  
L
O
R SP  
A
C
E
12  
13  
14  
C
s
RGB  
PI  
C
TURE  
C
TRL : ST  
A
N
DARD  
Frame number/total number of images  
Q
UI  
C
K
ADJUST  
:
:
-
3
O
T
R
ANSNT  
: 0  
: 0  
:0  
:0  
S
C
HANRPE  
I
N
G
White balance............................................................ 76  
White balance fine-tuning................................. 78  
Preset manual......................................................... 79  
B
RI  
G
H
T
ESNS  
S
A
TU  
R
A
TI  
O
HU  
E
Color space ...............................................................152  
15  
16  
17  
Picture Control........................................................... 86  
KO  
N
D5200  
1/12  
Quick adjust 4 ............................................................. 88  
Original Picture Control 5 ....................................... 87  
Sharpening ................................................................. 88  
18  
19  
20  
21  
.
:
:
:
:
23  
24  
25  
26  
O
I SE RE  
D
U
C
H
A I ISO  
,
N
OR  
M
NACDT  
D
UTO  
.
.
L IGHT  
Contrast........................................................................ 88  
H R  
RET  
O
UCH  
D
LMI  
H
TI  
G
ARNGFILNTER  
Brightness ................................................................... 88  
C
WY  
A
OTYPE  
Saturation 6 ................................................................. 88  
Filter effects 7.............................................................. 88  
Hue 6 .............................................................................. 88  
Toning 7 ........................................................................ 88  
High ISO noise reduction.....................................153  
Long exposure noise reduction ........................153  
Active D-Lighting ..................................................... 69  
TRI  
CO  
MM  
E
N
T
SPRMI N  
G
H
AS  
COM  
:
.
E
27  
22  
23  
KO  
N
D5200  
1/12  
Protect status ...........................................................126  
Retouch indicator...................................................179  
1
2
3
24  
25  
26  
27  
HDR (high dynamic range).................................... 71  
Retouch history.......................................................178  
Image comment .....................................................174  
Metering ...................................................................... 62  
Shutter speed...................................................... 57, 59  
Aperture................................................................ 58, 59  
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.  
2 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.  
3 Displayed only if photo was taken using optional flash unit with commander function.  
4 Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.  
5 Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.  
6 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.  
7 Monochrome Picture Controls only.  
121  
   
Overview Data  
1
2
3
N I KON D5200  
1/ 12  
4
5
12 13 14  
15  
16  
100  
17  
1 250 F11  
35mm  
18  
19  
26  
25  
+
1. 0  
1. 3  
1 250 F11  
100  
35mm  
+
1. 0  
1. 3  
24  
23 22  
21  
20  
_
100  
15  
D
5200  
DS  
C
0001. JP  
G
M
AL  
/
04 2012 10 02 27  
/
600N0Ox4R000  
6
:
:
11  
10  
9
8
7
Aperture ................................................................58, 59  
ISO sensitivity 1...........................................................49  
Focal length ............................................................. 203  
GPS data indicator ................................................. 175  
Image comment indicator.................................. 174  
Active D-Lighting......................................................69  
Picture Control ...........................................................86  
Color space............................................................... 152  
Flash mode..................................................................46  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Frame number/total number of images  
1
2
3
4
5
Protect status........................................................... 126  
Camera name  
Retouch indicator................................................... 179  
Histogram showing the distribution of tones in  
the image (0 120).  
Image quality..............................................................42  
6
7
8
Image size....................................................................44  
File name................................................................... 241  
Time of recording............................................ 16, 173  
Date of recording ............................................ 16, 173  
Folder name............................................................. 151  
Metering.......................................................................62  
Shooting mode.................................. 21, 24, 55, 111  
Shutter speed ......................................................57, 59  
9
White balance.............................................................76  
White balance fine-tuning.....................................78  
Preset manual.............................................................79  
Flash compensation.................................................67  
Commander mode 2  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
25  
26  
Exposure compensation.........................................65  
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.  
2 Displayed only if photo was taken using optional flash unit with commander function.  
GPS Data *  
1
2
Protect status........................................................... 126  
Retouch indicator .................................................. 179  
Latitude  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LATITUDE  
N
E
3
4
º
35 36. 371'  
Longitude  
LONGITUDE  
º
139 43. 696'  
35m  
Altitude  
ALTITUDE  
5
6
15/04/2012  
01 15 29  
TIME(UTC)  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
Camera name  
:
:
Frame number/total number of images  
N
I
KON  
D5200  
* Data for movies are for start of recording.  
7
1/12  
8
122  
     
Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images, press the W (Q)  
button.  
W (Q)  
W (Q)  
X
X
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Calendar  
playback  
To  
Use  
Description  
Display more  
images  
Press W (Q) button to increase the number of images  
displayed.  
W (Q)  
Press X button to reduce the number of images displayed.  
When four images are displayed, press to view highlighted  
image full frame.  
Display fewer  
images  
X
Use multi selector or command dial to highlight images for  
full-frame playback, playback zoom (0 125), deletion  
Highlight images  
Viewhighlighted  
image  
Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.  
Delete  
highlighted  
photo  
See page 127 for more information.  
O
Change protect  
status of  
highlighted  
photo  
See page 126 for more information.  
A (L)  
Return to  
shooting mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway. Monitor will turn off;  
photographs can be taken immediately.  
123  
   
Calendar Playback  
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button when 72 images are  
displayed.  
Thumbnail list  
W (Q)  
W (Q)  
X
X
Date list  
Calendar  
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
playback  
The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or  
the thumbnail list:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Toggle between date  
list and thumbnail list  
Exit to thumbnail  
playback/Zoom in on  
highlighted photo  
Press W (Q) button in date list to place cursor in  
thumbnail list. Press again to return to date list.  
W (Q)  
Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.  
Thumbnail list: Press and hold X button to zoom in on  
highlighted picture.  
X
Highlight dates/  
Highlight images  
Date list: Highlight date.  
Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.  
Toggle full frame  
playback  
Date list: View pictures taken on selected date.  
Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.  
Delete highlighted  
photo(s)  
Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.  
Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture (0 127).  
O
Change protect  
status of highlighted  
photo  
See page 126 for more information.  
A (L)  
Return to shooting  
mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway. Monitor will turn  
off; photographs can be taken immediately.  
124  
   
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the  
image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback. The following  
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X to zoom in to maximum of  
approximately 38× (large images), 28×  
(medium images) or 19× (small  
Zoom in or out  
X / W (Q)  
images). Press W (Q) to zoom out.  
While photo is zoomed in, use multi  
selector to view areas of image not  
visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly  
to other areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when  
zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor is  
indicated by yellow border.  
View other  
areas of image  
Faces (up to 35) detected during zoom  
are indicated by white borders in  
Select/zoom in  
on or out from  
faces  
navigation window. Press P and use  
the multi selector to view other faces,  
or press J to zoom in on the currently  
selected face. Press P again to return  
to normal zoom.  
P
Rotate command dial to view same location in other images at  
current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a  
movie is displayed.  
View other  
images  
Cancel zoom  
Cancel zoom and return to full-frame playback.  
See page 126 for more information.  
Changeprotect  
status  
A (L)  
Return to  
shooting mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway. Monitor will turn off;  
photographs can be taken immediately.  
125  
     
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the A (L) button can be  
used to protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be  
deleted using the O button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that  
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 168).  
To protect a photograph:  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the  
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Calendar playback  
2 Press the A (L) button.  
The photograph will be marked with a P  
icon. To remove protection from the  
photograph so that it can be deleted,  
display the photograph or highlight it in the  
thumbnail list and then press the A (L)  
button.  
A (L) button  
A Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the  
Playback folder menu (0 148), press the A (L) and O buttons together for about two  
seconds during playback.  
126  
   
Deleting Photographs  
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or the photograph  
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. To delete multiple selected  
photographs, all photographs taken on a selected date, or all photographs in the  
current playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once deleted,  
photographs can not be recovered.  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar  
playback.  
2 Press the O button.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Calendar playback  
(thumbnail list)  
3 Press the O button again.  
To delete the photograph, press the O  
button again. To exit without deleting the  
photograph, press the K button.  
A Calendar Playback  
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by  
highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O button (0 124).  
127  
       
The Playback Menu  
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that  
depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.  
Option  
Description  
Q Selected  
Delete selected pictures.  
n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date.  
R All  
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback (0 148).  
Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs  
1 Select Delete.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Delete in the playback menu and  
press 2.  
G button  
2 Choose Selected.  
Highlight Selected and press 2.  
3 Highlight a picture.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture  
(to view the highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the X button).  
4 Select the highlighted picture.  
Press the W (Q) button to select the  
highlighted picture. Selected pictures are  
marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to  
select additional pictures; to deselect a  
picture, highlight it and press W (Q).  
W (Q) button  
5 Press J to complete the operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
128  
       
Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date  
1 Choose Select Date.  
In the delete menu, highlight Select date  
and press 2.  
2 Highlight a date.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a date.  
To view the pictures taken on the  
highlighted date, press W (Q). Use the multi  
selector to scroll through the pictures, or  
press and hold X to view the current picture  
full screen. Press W (Q) to return to the date  
list.  
W (Q) button  
3 Select the highlighted date.  
Press 2 to select all pictures taken on the  
highlighted date. Selected dates are marked  
with a M icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select  
additional dates; to deselect a date,  
highlight it and press 2.  
4 Press J to complete the operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
129  
 
Slide Shows  
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a slide show of the  
pictures in the current playback folder (0 148).  
1 Select Slide show.  
To display the slide show menu, press the  
G button and select Slide show in the  
playback menu.  
G button  
2 Adjust slide show settings.  
To choose the type of images in the show,  
select Image type and choose from Still  
images and movies, Still images only, and  
Movies only.  
To choose how long still images are displayed,  
select Frame interval and choose from the  
options shown at right.  
130  
   
3 Start the slide show.  
Highlight Start in the slide show menu and  
press J.  
The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip  
to next frame.  
Skip back/skip ahead  
View additional photo info  
Pause/resume slide show  
Change photo info displayed (0 119).  
Pause show. Press again to resume.  
Press X during movie playback to increase  
volume, W (Q) to decrease.  
Raise/lower volume  
X / W (Q)  
Exit to playback mode  
K
End show and return to playback mode.  
Press shutter-release button halfway. Monitor  
will turn off; photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
Exit to shooting mode  
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends.  
Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu.  
131  
 
Connections  
Installing ViewNX 2  
Install the supplied software to display and  
edit photographs and movies that have  
been copied to your computer. Before  
installing ViewNX 2, confirm that your  
computer meets the system requirements  
on page 133. The latest version of ViewNX 2  
is available for download from the websites  
ViewNX 2TM  
Your Imaging Toolbox  
1 Start the computer and insert the installer CD.  
Windows  
Mac OS  
Double-click  
icon on desktop  
Double-click  
Welcome icon  
2 Select a language.  
q Select region (if required)  
If the desired language is not available,  
click Region Selection to choose a  
different region and then choose the  
desired language (region selection is  
not available in the European release).  
w Select  
language  
e Click  
Next  
3 Start the installer.  
Click Install and follow the on-screen instructions.  
A Installation Guide  
For help installing ViewNX 2, click Installation Guide  
in Step 3.  
Click Install  
132  
       
4 Exit the installer.  
Windows  
Mac OS  
Click Yes  
Click OK  
The following software is installed:  
ViewNX 2  
Apple QuickTime (Windows only)  
5 Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.  
A System Requirements  
Windows  
Mac OS  
Photos/JPEG movies: Intel Celeron, Pentium 4,  
Photos/JPEG movies: Intel Core or Xeon series  
H.264 movies (playback): Core Duo 2 GHz or  
better; Intel Core i5 or better recommended  
when viewing movies with a frame size of  
1280×720 or more at a frame rate of 30 fps  
or above or movies with a frame size of  
1920×1080 or more  
or Core series, 1.6 GHz or better  
H.264 movies (playback): 3.0 GHz or better  
Pentium D; Intel Core i5 or better  
recommended when viewing movies with  
a frame size of 1280×720 or more at a  
frame rate of 30 fps or above or movies  
with a frame size of 1920×1080 or more  
H.264 movies (editing): 2.6 GHz or better  
Core 2 Duo  
CPU  
H.264 movies (editing): 2.6 GHz or better  
Core 2 Duo  
Pre-installed versions of Windows 7 Home  
Basic/Home Premium/Professional/  
Enterprise/Ultimate (64- and 32-bit editions; Service  
Pack 1), Windows Vista Home Basic/Home  
Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate (64-  
and 32-bit editions; Service Pack 2), or Windows XP  
Home Edition/Professional (32-bit editions only;  
Service Pack 3).  
OS  
Mac OS X version 10.6.8, 10.7.5, or 10.8.2  
Windows 7/Windows Vista: 1 GB or more (2 GB or  
more recommended)  
Windows XP: 512 MB or more (2 GB or more  
recommended)  
RAM  
512 MB or more (2 GB or more recommended)  
Hard-disk  
space  
A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk (1 GB or more recommended)  
Resolution: 1024×768 pixels (XGA) or more Resolution: 1024×768 pixels (XGA) or more  
Monitor (1280×1024 pixels (SXGA) or more recommended)  
(1280×1024 pixels (SXGA) or more recommended)  
Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or more  
Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors) or more  
See the websites listed on page xv for the latest information on supported operating systems.  
133  
   
Using ViewNX 2  
Copy Pictures to the Computer  
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed the software on the supplied ViewNX 2  
CD (0 132).  
1 Choose how pictures will be copied to the computer.  
Choose one of the following methods:  
Direct USB connection: Turn the camera off and ensure that the memory card is  
inserted in the camera. Connect the camera to the computer using the  
supplied UC-E17 USB cable and then turn the camera on.  
A Use a Reliable Power Source  
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera EN-EL14 battery  
is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an EH-5b AC  
adapter and EP-5A power connector (available separately).  
A USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB  
hub or keyboard.  
SD card slot: If your computer is equipped with an SD card slot, the card can be  
inserted directly in the slot.  
SD card reader: Connect a card reader (available separately from third-party  
suppliers) to the computer and insert the memory card.  
2 Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.  
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select  
Nikon Transfer 2.  
A Windows 7  
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below.  
1 Under Import pictures and videos, click  
Change program. A program selection dialog  
will be displayed; select Import File using  
Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.  
2 Double-click Import File.  
134  
           
3 Click Start Transfer.  
At default settings, all the pictures on the  
memory card will be copied to the computer.  
Start Transfer  
4 Terminate the connection.  
If the camera is connected to the computer, turn the camera off and disconnect  
the USB cable. If you are using a card reader or card slot, choose the  
appropriate option in the computer operating system to eject the removable  
disk corresponding to the memory card and then remove the card from the  
card reader or card slot.  
View Pictures  
Pictures are displayed in ViewNX 2 when transfer is  
complete.  
A Starting ViewNX 2 Manually  
Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on  
the desktop.  
Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.  
Retouching Photographs  
To crop pictures and perform such tasks as adjusting sharpness  
and tone levels, click the Edit button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.  
Editing Movies  
To perform such tasks as trimming unwanted footage from  
movies shot with the camera, click the Movie Editor button in  
the ViewNX 2 toolbar.  
Printing Pictures  
Click the Print button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar. A dialog will be  
displayed, allowing you to print pictures on a printer connected  
to the computer.  
135  
 
A For More Information  
Consult online help for more information on using  
ViewNX 2.  
A Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use  
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Close the connector cover when the  
connector is not in use.  
D During Transfer  
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.  
A Camera Control Pro 2  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; 0 209) can be used to control the camera from a  
computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs directly to the  
computer, a capture mode indicator will be displayed in the viewfinder and information  
display.  
A Windows  
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All Programs > Link to Nikon  
from the Windows start menu (Internet connection required).  
136  
   
Printing Photographs  
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer (0 240) connected  
directly to the camera.  
Connecting the Printer  
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E17 USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Connect the USB cable.  
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or  
attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub.  
3 Turn the camera on.  
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor,  
followed by a PictBridge playback display.  
D Selecting Photographs for Printing  
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 42) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu  
(0 186).  
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection  
Be sure the EN-EL14 battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5A  
power connector. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection, set  
Color space to sRGB (0 152).  
A See Also  
See page 228 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing.  
137  
           
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
1 Select a picture.  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X  
button to zoom in on the current frame (0 125; press K to  
exit zoom). To view six pictures at a time, press the W (Q)  
button. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or  
press X to display the highlighted picture full frame.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.  
Option  
Description  
Highlight a page size (only sizes supported by the current printer are listed)  
Page size and press J to select and exit to the previous menu (to print at the default  
page size for the current printer, select Printer default).  
No. of Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J to  
copies select and return to the previous menu.  
This option is available only if supported by the printer. Highlight Printer  
default (use current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with  
white border), or No border and press J to select and exit to the previous  
Border  
menu.  
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings), Print time stamp  
(print times and dates of recording on photos), or No time stamp and press J  
to select and exit to the previous menu.  
Time  
stamp  
This option is available only if supported by the printer. To exit without  
cropping, highlight No cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,  
highlight Crop and press 2.  
A crop selection dialog will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the  
Cropping  
crop, W (Q) to decrease. Position the crop using the multi selector and press  
J. Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.  
138  
         
4 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To  
cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.  
D Date Imprint  
If you select Print time stamp in the PictBridge menu when printing photographs  
containing date information recorded using Custom Setting d6 (Print date; 0 163), the date  
will appear twice. The imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs are  
cropped or printed without a border.  
139  
 
Printing Multiple Pictures  
1 Display the PictBridge menu.  
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display  
G button  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.  
Print select: Select pictures for printing.  
Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a  
selected date.  
Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the DPOF print order  
option in the playback menu (0 143). The current print order will be  
displayed in Step 3.  
Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card,  
proceed to Step 4. Note that if the memory card contains more than 256  
pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.  
140  
   
3 Select pictures or choose a date.  
If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in Step 2, press 4 or  
2 to scroll through the pictures on the memory card. To  
display the current picture full screen, press and hold the X  
button. To select the current picture for printing, press 1.  
The picture will be marked with a Z icon and the number  
of prints will be set to 1; press 1 or 3 to specify the  
number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3  
when the number of prints is 1).  
X button: View photo full  
screen  
If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1 or 3 to highlight a  
date and press 2 to toggle the highlighted date on or off.  
To view the pictures taken on the selected date, press W  
(Q). Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures, or  
press and hold X to view the current picture full screen.  
Press W (Q) again to return to the date selection dialog.  
Xbutton: View highlighted  
photo full screen  
W (Q) button: View  
photos for selected date  
141  
4 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
5 Adjust printing options.  
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 138 (a  
warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small for an index  
print).  
6 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To  
cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.  
142  
 
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set  
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print  
orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF.  
1 Choose Select/set for the DPOF print  
order item in the playback menu.  
Press the G button and select DPOF print  
order in the playback menu. Highlight  
Select/set and press 2 (to remove all  
photographs from the print order, select  
G button  
Deselect all?).  
2 Select pictures.  
Press 4 or 2 to scroll through the pictures  
on the memory card. To display the current  
picture full screen, press and hold the X  
button. To select the current picture for  
printing, press 1. The picture will be marked  
with a Z icon and the number of prints will  
be set to 1; press 1 or 3 to specify the  
number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the  
picture, press 3 when the number of prints  
is 1). Continue until all the desired pictures  
have been selected.  
X button: View photo full screen  
3 Display imprint options.  
Press J to display data imprint options.  
143  
     
4 Select imprint options.  
Highlight the following options and press 2  
to toggle the highlighted option on or off (to  
complete the print order without including  
this information, proceed to Step 5).  
Print shooting data: Print shutter speed and  
aperture on all pictures in print order.  
Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.  
5 Complete the print order.  
Press J to complete the print order.  
D DPOF Print Order  
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select  
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to  
modify and print the current order (0 140). DPOF print date and shooting data options are  
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on  
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.  
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory  
card to store the print order.  
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 42) can not be selected using this option. JPEG copies of NEF  
(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu  
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device  
after the print order is created.  
144  
     
Viewing Photographs on TV  
The supplied EG-CP16 audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the camera to  
a television or video recorder for playback or recording. A type C mini-pin High-  
Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from third-party  
suppliers) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.  
Standard Definition Devices  
Before connecting the camera to a standard television, confirm that the camera  
video standard (0 172) matches that used in the TV.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.  
2 Connect the A/V cable as shown.  
Audio (red)  
Audio (white)  
Video (yellow)  
Connect to camera  
Connect to video device  
3 Tune the television to the video channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the television screen. Note that  
the edges of images may not be displayed.  
A Video Mode  
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and that the option  
selected for Video mode (0 172) matches the video standard used in the TV.  
A Television Playback  
Use of an EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5A power connector (available separately) is  
recommended for extended playback.  
145  
         
High-Definition Devices  
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini-pin HDMI cable  
(available separately from third-party suppliers).  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.  
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.  
Connect to camera  
Connect to high-definition device  
(choose cable with connector for HDMI device)  
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or  
monitor screen. Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.  
D Close the Connector Cover  
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the  
connectors can interfere with data transfer.  
A Playback Volume  
Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls can not be used.  
146  
     
HDMI Options  
The HDMI option in the setup menu controls output resolution and can be used to  
enable the camera for remote control from devices that support HDMI-CEC (High-  
Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer Electronics Control, a standard that  
allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to which they are connected).  
Output Resolution  
Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If  
Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select the  
appropriate format. Regardless of the option selected, Auto will  
be used for movie recording and playback.  
Device Control  
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup  
menu when the camera is connected to a television that  
supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera and television are  
on, the display shown at right will appear on the television  
and the television remote can be used in place of the  
camera multi selector and J button during full-frame  
playback and slide shows. If Off is selected, the television remote can not be used to  
control the camera.  
A HDMI-CEC Devices  
When the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the viewfinder in  
place of the number of exposures remaining.  
A Device Control  
See the television manual for details.  
A HDMI and Live View  
HDMI displays connected via an HDMI cable can be used for live view and movie recording  
(0 99, 105). During movie recording and playback, HDMI output is adjusted according to  
the option selected for Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate in the shooting menu  
(0 103). Note that some devices may not support the selected setting; in this case, select  
1080i (interlaced) for HDMI > Output resolution. Movies may be output at a frame size  
smaller than that selected for Frame size/frame rate (0 103).  
147  
       
Camera Menus  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images  
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D (playback menu) tab.  
G button  
The playback menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Default  
Current  
0
Delete  
Playback folder  
Playback display  
options  
Image review  
Rotate tall  
Slide show  
On  
On  
Still images  
and movies  
2 s  
Image type  
Frame interval  
DPOF print order  
G button D playback menu  
Playback Folder  
Choose a folder for playback:  
Option  
Description  
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Storage folder in the shooting  
menu (0 151) are displayed during playback. This option is selected automatically  
Current when a photo is taken. If a memory card is inserted and this option selected before  
photos have been taken, a message stating that the folder contains no images may  
be displayed during playback. Select All to begin playback.  
All  
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.  
148  
           
G button D playback menu  
Playback Display Options  
Choose the information available in the playback photo  
information display (0 119). Press 1 or 3 to highlight an  
option, then press 2 to select the option for the photo  
information display. A M appears next to selected items; to  
deselect, highlight and press 2. To return to the playback  
menu, press J.  
G button D playback menu  
Image Review  
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the  
monitor immediately after shooting. If Off is selected, pictures  
can only be displayed by pressing the K button.  
G button D playback menu  
Rotate Tall  
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures  
for display during playback. Note that because the camera itself  
is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting,  
images are not rotated automatically during image review.  
Option  
On  
Description  
Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for display in the  
camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 174)  
will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.  
Off  
Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.  
149  
               
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C (shooting menu) tab.  
G button  
The shooting menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Reset shooting menu  
Storage folder  
Image quality  
Image size  
Default  
JPEG normal  
Large  
0
Option  
Default  
0
150 Release mode  
151 m, w  
Continuous H  
Single frame  
Other modes  
44 Multiple exposure 1  
White balance  
Auto  
Multiple exposure mode  
Number of shots  
Auto gain  
Interval timer shooting  
Movie settings  
Frame size/frame rate 3  
Movie quality  
Off  
2
On  
Off 2  
Cool-white  
fluorescent  
Standard  
Off  
sRGB  
Auto  
Off  
Off  
Normal  
Fluorescent  
Set Picture Control  
Manage Picture Control  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
High quality  
Auto sensitivity  
Off  
Active D-Lighting  
Microphone  
Manual movie settings  
HDR (high dynamic range)  
Long exposure NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings  
P, S , A , M  
Other modes  
Auto ISO sensitivity control  
100  
Auto  
Off  
ISO sensitivity  
1
2
3
Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress.  
Resetting shooting menu options resets the start time to Now, interval to 1 min., number of times to 1.  
Default varies with country of purchase.  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.  
For information on the options available in each shooting mode, see page 221.  
G button C shooting menu  
Reset Shooting Menu  
Select Yes to reset shooting menu settings.  
150  
         
G button C shooting menu  
Storage Folder  
Create, rename, or delete folders, or choose the folder in which subsequent  
photographs will be stored.  
Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored.  
Current folder  
D5200 (default folder)  
Other folders (in alphabetical  
order)  
New: Create a new folder and name it as described on page 91. Folder names can  
be up to five characters long.  
Rename: Select a folder from the list and rename it as described on page 91.  
Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.  
D Folder Names  
On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned  
automatically by the camera (e.g., 100D5200). Each folder can contain up to 999  
photographs. During shooting, pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the  
selected name. If a photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a  
photograph numbered 9999, the camera will create a new folder by adding 1 to the current  
folder number (e.g., 101D5200). The camera treats folders with the same name but different  
folder numbers as the same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON is selected for Storage  
folder, photographs in all folders named NIKON (100NIKON, 101NIKON, 102NIKON, etc.) will  
be visible when Current is selected for Playback folder (0 148). Renaming changes all  
folders with the same name but leaves the folder numbers intact. Selecting Delete deletes  
empty numbered folders but leaves other folders with the same name intact.  
G button C shooting menu  
Auto Distortion Control  
Select On to reduce barrel distortion in photos taken with wide-  
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion in photos  
taken with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in  
the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and  
that the time needed to process photographs before recording  
begins may increase). This option does not apply to movies and  
is available only with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses  
excluded); results are not guaranteed with other lenses.  
A Retouch: Distortion Control  
For information creating copies of existing photographs with reduced barrel and pin-  
151  
         
G button C shooting menu  
Color Space  
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for  
color reproduction. Choose sRGB for photographs that will be  
printed or used “as is,” with no further modification. Adobe RGB  
has a wider color gamut and is recommended for images that  
will be extensively processed or retouched after leaving the  
camera.  
A Color Space  
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that  
represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is widely used, while the Adobe  
RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is  
recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or  
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photographs  
that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or  
kiosk printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be  
printed using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.  
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant; applications and  
printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically. If the application  
or device does not support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually. For more  
information, see the documentation provided with the application or device.  
A Nikon Software  
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct  
color space when opening photographs created with this camera.  
152  
           
G button C shooting menu  
Long Exposure NR  
If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower  
than 1 s will be processed to reduce noise (bright spots,  
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog). The time required for  
processing roughly doubles; during processing, “l m” will flash in the viewfinder  
and pictures can not be taken (if the camera is turned off before processing is  
complete, the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be performed).  
G button C shooting menu  
High ISO NR  
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.”  
Option  
High  
Description  
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or fog), particularly in  
Normal photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the amount of noise reduction  
performed from High, Normal, and Low.  
Low  
Noise reduction is only performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 1600 and higher. The  
amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected  
for High ISO NR.  
Off  
G button C shooting menu  
ISO Sensitivity Settings  
Adjust ISO sensitivity (0 49).  
153  
           
Auto ISO Sensitivity control  
If Off is chosen for Auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M modes, ISO sensitivity  
will remain fixed at the value selected by the user (0 49). When On is chosen, ISO  
sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at  
the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted appropriately when the  
flash is used). The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the  
Maximum sensitivity option in the Auto ISO sensitivity control menu (choose  
lower values to prevent noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines, but note  
that if the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than that chosen for  
Maximum sensitivity, the value selected by the user will be used instead; the  
minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100)). In modes P  
and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter  
speed selected for Minimum shutter speed (1/2000–1 s, or Auto; in modes S and M,  
sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the  
user). If Auto (available only with CPU lenses) is selected, the camera will choose the  
minimum shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed  
selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2 ; for example, faster  
values can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur). Slower shutter speeds will  
be used only if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value  
selected for Maximum sensitivity.  
When On is selected, the viewfinder shows ISO-AUTO and the  
information display ISO-A. These indicators flash when  
sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user.  
A Maximum Sensitivity/Minimum Shutter Speed  
When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the ISO sensitivity  
and shutter speed graphics in the information display show the  
maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed.  
Minimum shutter speed  
Maximum sensitivity  
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use  
the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise (0 153). Note that ISO  
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in  
combination with slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the optional  
flash units listed on page 205), possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter  
speeds.  
154  
       
A Custom Settings:  
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings  
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the A (Custom Settings  
menu) tab.  
G button  
Custom Setting groups  
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings  
to suit individual preferences.  
Main menu  
Reset custom  
settings (0 156)  
155  
   
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Custom Setting  
Reset custom settings  
Default  
0
a
Autofocus  
a1 AF-C priority selection  
a2 Number of focus points  
a3 Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a4 Rangefinder  
Focus  
39 points  
On  
Off  
b
Exposure  
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl  
Timers/AE lock  
1/3 step  
c
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2 Auto off timers  
Off  
Normal  
c3 Self-timer  
Self-timer delay: 10 s; number of shots: 1 160  
c4 Remote on duration (ML-L3)  
1 min  
d
Shooting/display  
d1 Beep  
d2 Viewfinder grid display  
d3 ISO display  
d4 File number sequence  
d5 Exposure delay mode  
d6 Print date  
Low  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
e
Bracketing/flash  
e1 Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e2 Auto bracketing set  
TTL  
AE bracketing  
f
Controls  
f1 Assign Fn button  
f2 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
ISO sensitivity  
AE/AF lock  
Exposure compensation: U  
Shutter speed/aperture: U  
Release locked  
f3 Reverse dial rotation  
f4 Slot empty release lock  
f5 Reverse indicators  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable. For  
information on the options available in each shooting mode, see page 221.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Reset Custom Settings  
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values.  
156  
   
a: Autofocus  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection  
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (0 33), this option controls  
whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed  
(release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).  
Option  
Release  
Focus  
Description  
G
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Photos can only be taken once the camera has focused.  
F
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a2: Number of Focus Points  
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection.  
Option  
Description  
# 39 points Choose from the 39 focus points shown at right.  
Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right. Use for  
quick focus-point selection.  
A 11 points  
157  
           
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator  
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist  
the focus operation when lighting is poor.  
AF-assist illuminator  
Option  
Description  
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor. AF-assist illumination is only  
available when both of the following conditions are met:  
1. AF-S is selected for focus mode (0 33) or single-servo autofocus is selected  
when the viewfinder is used in AF-A mode.  
On  
2. e (Auto-area AF) is chosen for AF-area mode (0 36), or an option other than  
e is chosen and the center focus point is selected.  
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera  
may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor.  
Off  
A See Also  
See page 35 for information on using the AF-assist illuminator. Information on the shooting  
modes in which AF-assist is available may be found on page 221. See page 203 for  
restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist.  
158  
   
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a4: Rangefinder  
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether the camera is  
correctly focused in manual focus mode (0 40; note that this function is not available  
in shooting mode M, when the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject  
is correctly exposed).  
Indicator  
Description  
Indicator  
Description  
Focus point is slightly  
behind subject.  
Subject in focus.  
Focus point is slightly in  
front of subject.  
Focus point is well  
behind subject.  
Camera can not  
determine correct  
focus.  
Focus point is well in  
front of subject.  
A Using the Electronic Rangefinder  
The electronic rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. The  
desired results may not be achieved in situations in which the camera would be unable to  
focus using autofocus (0 34). The electronic rangefinder is not available during live view.  
b: Exposure  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl  
Select the increments used when making adjustments to  
shutter speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and  
bracketing.  
c: Timers/AE Lock  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
159  
               
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c2: Auto off Timers  
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no operations are  
performed during menu display and playback (Playback/menus), while  
photographs are displayed in the monitor after shooting (Image review), and during  
live view (Live view), and how long the standby timer, viewfinder, and information  
display remain on when no operations are performed (Standby timer). Choose  
shorter auto-off delays to reduce the drain on the battery.  
Option  
Description (all times are approximate)  
Auto off timers are set to the following values:  
Playback/menus  
20 s  
Image review  
Live view  
5 min.  
10 min.  
20 min.  
Standby timer  
4 s  
C Short  
D Normal  
E Long  
Short  
Normal  
Long  
4 s  
4 s  
20 s  
1 min.  
5 min.  
8 s  
1 min.  
Choose separate delays for Playback/menus, Image review, Live view, and  
Standby timer. When settings are complete, press J.  
F Custom  
A Auto off Timers  
The monitor and viewfinder will not turn off automatically when the camera is connected to  
a computer or printer via USB.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c3: Self-Timer  
Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number  
of shots taken.  
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.  
Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed (from 1  
to 9; if a value other than 1 is selected, shots will be taken at  
4 s intervals).  
160  
         
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3)  
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the  
optional ML-L3 remote control before cancelling the currently  
selected remote control release mode and restoring the  
previously selected release mode (0 31). Choose shorter times  
for longer battery life. This setting applies only during  
viewfinder photography.  
d: Shooting/Display  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d1: Beep  
Choose the pitch (High or Low) of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses  
using single-servo AF (AF-S or when single-servo AF is selected for AF-A; 0 33), when  
focus locks in live view, while the release timer is counting down in self-timer and  
delayed remote modes (0 31), and when a photograph is taken in quick-response  
remote mode (0 31). Select Off to prevent the beep from sounding. Note that a  
beep will not sound in quiet-shutter release mode (mode J; 0 29).  
The current setting is shown in the information display: 3 is  
displayed when the beep is on, 2 when it is off.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display  
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for  
reference when composing photographs (0 4).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d3: ISO Display  
Select On to display ISO sensitivity in the viewfinder in place of  
the number of exposures remaining.  
161  
                   
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d4: File Number Sequence  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding 1 to the last file  
number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last  
number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new  
memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card  
inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or from  
On the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a photograph is  
taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder  
will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.  
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is  
formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder  
is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains  
Off  
999 photographs.  
Resets the file numbering for On to 0001 and creates a new folder with the next  
photograph taken.  
Reset  
D File Number Sequence  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph  
numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can  
be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 (File number sequence) and then either  
format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d5: Exposure Delay Mode  
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur  
pictures, select On to delay shutter release until about 1 s after  
the shutter-release button is pressed and the mirror is raised.  
162  
       
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d6: Print Date  
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they are taken.  
Option  
Off  
Description  
The time and date do not appear on photographs.  
The date or date and time are imprinted on  
photographs taken while this option is in  
effect.  
15.04.2012  
a
b
c
Date  
1155..0044..22001122 1100::02  
Date and time  
Date counter  
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp showing the number of  
days between the date of shooting and a selected date (see below).  
At settings other than Off, the selected option is indicated by a  
d icon in the information display.  
A Print Date  
The date is recorded in the order selected for Time zone and date (0 173). The date does  
not appear on NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG images and can not be added to or removed  
from existing photos. To print the date of recording on photographs taken with print date  
off, select Print time stamp in the PictBridge menu (0 138), or select Print date in the  
DPOF print order menu to print the date of recording on all pictures in the current DPOF  
print order (0 144).  
Date Counter  
Pictures taken while this option is in effect are imprinted with  
the number of days remaining until a future date or the number  
of days elapsed since a past date. Use it to track the growth of a  
child or count down the days until a birthday or wedding.  
02 / 20.04.2012  
02 / 24.04.2012  
Future date (two days remaining)  
Past date (two days elapsed)  
Up to three separate dates can be stored in slots 1, 2, and 3. The  
first time you use the date counter, you will be prompted to  
select a date for slot 1; enter a date using the multi selector and  
press J. To change the date or store additional dates, highlight  
a slot, press 2, and enter the date. To use the stored date,  
highlight the slot and press J.  
To choose a date counter format, highlight Display options and  
press 2 to display the menu shown at right. Highlight an option  
and press J. Press J in the date counter menu when settings  
are complete.  
163  
       
e: Bracketing/Flash  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash  
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M modes.  
Option  
Description  
1 TTL  
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.  
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/32 (1/32 of full  
power). At full power, the built-in flash has a Guide  
Number of 13/43 (m/ft., ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F).  
2
Manual  
A Manual  
A Y icon flashes in the viewfinder and 0 flashes in the  
information display when Manual is selected and the flash is raised.  
A The SB-400  
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached and turned on, Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode for the SB-400 to be selected  
from TTL and Manual.  
A Flash Control  
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in combination  
with the built-in flash (0 45) or optional flash units (0 204).  
i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Information from the 2016-pixel RGB sensor is used to  
adjust flash output for a natural balance between the main subject and the background.  
Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the  
brightness of the background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in which  
the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or when exposure  
compensation is used.  
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional  
flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e2: Auto Bracketing Set  
Choose the setting (exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting) varied when  
bracketing is in effect (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 83).  
164  
                     
f: Controls  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f1: Assign Fn Button  
Choose the role played by the Fn button.  
Fn button  
Option  
Description  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select  
image quality and size (0 42).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select ISO  
sensitivity (0 49).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select  
white balance (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 76).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select  
Active D-Lighting (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 69).  
Image quality/size *  
ISO sensitivity *  
White balance *  
Active D-Lighting *  
HDR *  
v
w
m
!
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to adjust  
HDR settings (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 71).  
$
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic,  
“RAW” will appear in the information display and an NEF (RAW) copy  
will be recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is  
pressed. To exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn  
button again. This option has no effect when Night vision, Color  
sketch, Miniature effect, or Selective color is selected in special  
effects mode.  
+NEF (RAW)  
&
t
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to choose  
Auto bracketing * the bracketing increment (exposure and white balance bracketing) or  
to turn ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 83).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to choose an  
AF-area mode (0 36).  
AF-area mode *  
"
Press the Fn button to start live view. To end live view, press the button  
again (0 93).  
Live view  
a
AE/AF lock  
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed.  
B
C
AE lock only  
Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and remains locked  
until the button is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.  
AE lock (Hold)  
AF lock only  
AF-ON  
E
F
Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
The Fn button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can not  
be used to focus.  
A
* Selected option can be viewed in information display by pressing Fn button.  
165  
     
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button  
Choose the role played by the A (L) button.  
Option  
Description  
Focus and exposure lock while the A (L) button is  
pressed.  
AE/AF lock  
B
C
AE lock only Exposure locks while the A (L) button is pressed.  
A (L) button  
Exposure locks when the A (L) button is pressed,  
AE lock (Hold) and remains locked until the button is pressed a  
second time or the standby timer expires.  
E
AF lock only Focus locks while the A (L) button is pressed.  
F
The A (L) button initiates autofocus. The shutter-  
release button can not be used to focus.  
A
AF-ON  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f3: Reverse Dial Rotation  
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dial when  
they are used to make adjustments to exposure or flash  
compensation (Exposure compensation) and/or shutter speed  
and aperture (Shutter speed/aperture). Highlight options and  
press 2 to select or deselect, then press J.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f4: Slot Empty Release Lock  
If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a  
memory card is inserted in the camera. Selecting Enable release allows the shutter  
to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be  
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f5: Reverse Indicators  
If  
(V) is selected, the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and  
information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values  
on the right. Select  
(W) to display negative values on the left and  
positive values on the right.  
166  
               
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup menu) tab.  
G button  
The setup menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Format memory card  
Monitor brightness  
Info display format  
Default  
0
0
Option  
Default  
Auto  
0
168 Flicker reduction  
168 Time zone and date 2  
Daylight saving time  
Language 2  
Off  
On  
Graphic design  
(blue)  
Graphic design  
(blue)  
AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS  
P/S/A/M  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Accessory terminal  
Auto info display  
Clean image sensor  
On  
Remote shutter release  
Take photos  
Standby timer/  
Enable; Use GPS to  
set camera clock/Yes  
Enable  
Clean at startup &  
GPS  
Clean at startup/shutdown  
shutdown  
Lock mirror up for cleaning1  
Image Dust Off ref photo  
Video mode 2  
Eye-Fi upload 3  
Wireless mobile adapter  
Firmware version  
Enable  
HDMI  
Output resolution  
Device control  
Auto  
On  
1 Not available when battery is low.  
2 Default varies with country of purchase.  
3 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0 176).  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.  
167  
     
G button B Setup menu  
Format Memory Card  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being formatted in other  
devices. Format the card as described below.  
D Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any  
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (0 134).  
1 Highlight Yes.  
To exit without formatting the memory card,  
highlight No and press J.  
2 Press J.  
The message at right will be displayed while  
the card is formatted. Do not remove the  
memory card or remove or disconnect the  
power source until formatting is complete.  
G button B setup menu  
Monitor Brightness  
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher  
values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced  
brightness.  
168  
       
G button B setup menu  
Info Display Format  
Choose an information display format (0 6). Formats can be chosen separately for  
auto, scene, and special effects modes and for P, S, A, and M modes.  
Classic (0 170)  
Graphic (0 6)  
1 Select a shooting mode option.  
Highlight AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS or P/S/A/M  
and press 2.  
2 Select a format and background color.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a background  
color for the desired format and press J.  
169  
   
The “Classic” display is shown below.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
9
12  
13  
14  
17  
11  
15  
16  
21 20 19 18  
10  
22 23 24 25 26 27 28  
35 34 33 32 31 30 29  
1 Eye-Fi connection  
14 Aperture (f-number) ......58, 59 24 Bracketing increment........... 84  
indicator............................. 176  
15 Exposure indicator................ 59 25 HDR (High Dynamic  
2 GPS connection  
Exposure compensation  
indicator............................... 65  
Bracketing progress  
Range)................................... 71  
26 Active D-Lighting .................. 69  
27 White balance ........................ 76  
28 ISO sensitivity........................ 49  
29 Exposure compensation...... 65  
30 Flash compensation ............. 67  
31 Flash mode ............................. 46  
32 Metering.................................. 62  
33 AF-area mode.................. 36, 95  
34 Focus mode ..................... 33, 94  
35 Picture Control ...................... 86  
indicator............................. 176  
3 Exposure delay mode ........ 162  
4 Multiple exposure  
indicator............................... 85  
16 “K” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures) ........................... 20  
17 Number of exposures  
indicator................................75  
5 Print date indicator............. 163  
6 Flash control indicator....... 164  
Flash compensation indicator  
for optional flash units... 208  
7 Release mode .........................29  
8 “Beep” indicator.................. 161  
9 Battery indicator ....................20  
10 Help icon.........................11, 228  
11 Bracketing indicator .............83  
12 Shooting mode  
remaining ............................ 20  
White balance recording  
indicator .............................. 79  
Capture mode indicator .... 136  
18 ISO sensitivity........................ 49  
19 Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator............................. 154  
20 ADL bracketing amount ..... 85  
21 Auto-area AF indicator ........ 36  
3D-tracking indicator........... 36  
Focus point ............................. 38  
22 Image quality......................... 42  
23 Image size............................... 44  
i auto/  
j auto (flash off) ..............21  
Scene modes ......................24  
P, S, A, and M modes...........55  
Special effects mode...... 111  
13 Shutter speed ..................57, 59  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
170  
 
G button B setup menu  
Auto Info Display  
If On is selected, the information display will appear after the shutter-release button  
is pressed halfway; if image review (0 149) is off, it will also be displayed immediately  
after shooting. Choose On if you find yourself frequently referring to the information  
display during shooting. If Off is selected, the information display can be viewed by  
pressing the P button.  
G button B setup menu  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available  
separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).  
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the  
camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a  
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.  
1 Choose a start option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J. To exit without acquiring image dust off  
data, press G.  
Start: The message shown at right will be  
displayed and “rEF” will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to  
clean the image sensor before starting. The  
message shown at right will be displayed and  
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder when  
cleaning is complete.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed  
can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed.  
Select Clean sensor and then start only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not  
be used with existing photographs.  
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.  
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless  
white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus  
mode, set focus to infinity manually.  
171  
         
3 Acquire Image Dust Off reference data.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust  
Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is  
pressed. Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,  
increasing recording times.  
If the reference object is too bright or too dark,  
the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust  
Off reference data and the message shown at  
right will be displayed. Choose another reference  
object and repeat the process from step 1.  
D Image Dust Off Reference Data  
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with  
different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not  
be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is  
displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera.  
G button B setup menu  
Video Mode  
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR, be sure the camera video mode  
matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).  
G button B setup menu  
Flicker Reduction  
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury-vapor  
lighting during live view (0 93) or movie recording (0 101). Choose Auto to allow  
the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the  
frequency to that of the local AC power supply.  
A Flicker Reduction  
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and If you are unsure as to the frequency of the  
local power supply, test both options and choose the one that produces the best results.  
Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which  
case you should select mode A or M and choose a smaller aperture (higher f-number) before  
starting live view. Note that flicker reduction is not available when On is selected for Movie  
settings > Manual movie settings (0 104) in mode M.  
172  
       
G button B setup menu  
Time Zone and Date  
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date  
display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.  
Option  
Description  
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is  
automatically set to the time in the new time zone.  
Time zone  
Set the camera clock (0 16).  
Date and time  
Date format  
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year  
are displayed.  
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock  
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.  
The default setting is Off.  
Daylight  
saving time  
G button B setup menu  
Language  
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.  
173  
                   
G button B setup menu  
Image Comment  
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as  
metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 209). The  
comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display  
(0 121). The following options are available:  
Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 91. Comments can be up to  
36 characters long.  
Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all  
subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned  
on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing  
the desired setting, press J to exit.  
G button B setup menu  
Auto Image Rotation  
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation,  
allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback or when viewed in  
ViewNX 2 or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 209). The following orientations  
are recorded:  
Landscape (wide) orientation Camera rotated 90° clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counterclockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when  
panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.  
A Rotate Tall  
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,  
select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (0 149).  
174  
       
G button B setup menu  
Accessory Terminal  
Choose the role of the optional accessory connected to the accessory terminal.  
Remote Shutter Release  
If Remote shutter release is selected, you can choose whether the shutter-release  
button on optional accessory is used for photography or movie recording. Remote  
shutter release is available when an optional WR-R10 wireless remote controller is  
connected to the camera and used with the shutter-release button on a WR-T10  
wireless remote controller. Remote shutter release is also available with optional  
MC-DC2 remote cords (0 210).  
Option  
Description  
The shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used to take  
photographs.  
y Take photos  
The shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used for movie  
recording. Press the button halfway to start live view or to focus in AF-S  
and AF-F modes. Press the button all the way down to start or end  
recording. Use the live view switch to end live view.  
z Record movies  
GPS  
This item is used to adjust settings for optional GPS units (0 210). A GPS unit can be  
connected to the camera’s accessory terminal (0 210) using the cable supplied with  
the unit, allowing information on the camera’s current position to be recorded when  
photographs are taken (turn the camera off before connecting the GPS unit; for more  
information, see the GPS unit manual).  
The GPS menu contains the options listed below.  
Standby timer: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when the  
a GPS unit is attached.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the  
time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers > Standby timer, 0 160 to  
Enable allow the camera time to acquire GPS data, the delay is extended by up to one  
minute after exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on). This  
reduces the drain on the battery.  
Disable Exposure meters do not turn off while a GPS unit is connected.  
Position: This item is only available if a GPS unit is connected, when it displays the  
current latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as  
reported by GPS.  
Use GPS to set camera clock: Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time  
reported by the GPS device.  
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.  
175  
           
A The h Icon  
Connection status is shown by the h icon:  
h (static): Camera has established communication with GPS unit.  
Photo information for pictures taken while this icon is displayed  
include an additional page of GPS data (0 122).  
h (flashing): The GPS unit is searching for a signal. Pictures taken  
while the icon is flashing do not include GPS data.  
No icon: No new GPS data have been received from the GPS unit for  
at least two seconds. Pictures taken when the h icon is not  
displayed do not include GPS data.  
G button B setup menu  
Eye-Fi Upload  
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card (available separately from  
third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera. Choose Enable to upload  
photographs to a preselected destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if  
signal strength is insufficient.  
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where  
wireless devices are prohibited.  
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is indicated by an icon  
in the information display:  
d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.  
e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for  
upload.  
f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.  
f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.  
g: Error.  
D Eye-Fi Cards  
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a warning is displayed in  
the monitor (0 228), turn the camera off and remove the card.  
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries to the manufacturer.  
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi  
functions.  
A Supported Eye-Fi Cards  
As of October 2012, the camera supports 8 GB SDHC Pro X2 Eye-Fi cards. Some cards may  
not be available in some countries or regions; consult the manufacturer for more  
information. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-Fi card  
firmware has been updated to the latest version.  
A Using Eye-Fi Cards in Ad Hoc Mode  
Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye-Fi cards that support ad hoc  
mode. Select longer values for Auto off timers > Standby timer in the setup menu (0 160).  
176  
         
G button B setup menu  
Wireless Mobile Adapter  
Choose whether the camera will establish wireless connections with smart devices  
when an optional WU-1a wireless mobile adapter (0 210) is attached to the camera  
USB and A/V connector.  
Option  
Description  
Enable wireless connections to smart devices running the Wireless Mobile  
Adapter Utility.  
Enable  
Disable wireless connections to smart devices. Choose this option in  
locations where the use of wireless devices is prohibited. Selecting this  
option also reduces the drain on the camera battery.  
Disable  
G button B setup menu  
Firmware Version  
View the current camera firmware version.  
177  
     
N The Retouch Menu:  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch menu) tab.  
G button  
The retouch menu is used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs  
on the memory card, and is only available when a memory card containing  
photographs is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
D-Lighting  
Red-eye correction  
Trim  
Monochrome  
Filter effects  
0
Option  
0
Option  
Color sketch  
Perspective control  
Miniature effect  
Selective color  
Edit movie  
0
i
j
k
0
1
2
e
NEF (RAW) processing 186  
Resize  
Quick retouch  
Straighten  
Distortion control  
Fisheye  
g
r
u
3
l
m
(
)
f
n Color balance  
Image overlay 1  
Side-by-side  
comparison 2  
p
o
q
Color outline  
1 Can only be selected by pressing G button and selecting N tab.  
2 Available only if J button is pressed in full-frame playback when a retouched image or  
original is displayed.  
A Retouching Copies  
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although with  
the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie > Choose start/end point, each option  
can be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that  
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.  
A Image Quality  
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF (RAW) processing, and  
Resize, copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original, while  
copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images. Time  
stamps added with Custom Setting d6 (Print Date; 0 163) may however be cropped out or  
illegible depending on the retouch options used.  
178  
       
Creating Retouched Copies  
To create a retouched copy:  
1 Display retouch options.  
Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a picture.  
Highlight a picture and press J.  
A Retouch  
The camera may not be able to display or retouch  
images created with other devices. If the image was  
recorded at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG (0 42), retouch options apply only to the JPEG  
copy (Image overlay and NEF (RAW) processing  
excepted).  
3 Select retouch options.  
For more information, see the section for the  
selected item. To exit without creating a  
retouched copy, press G.  
4 Create a retouched copy.  
Press J to create a retouched copy. Except in the  
photo information “image only” page (0 119),  
retouched copies are indicated by a N icon.  
A Creating Retouched Copies During Playback  
Retouched copies can also be created during playback.  
Display picture full frame and  
Highlight an option and  
Create retouched copy.  
press J.  
press J.  
179  
     
G button N retouch menu  
D-Lighting  
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.  
Before  
After  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of correction performed.  
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy  
the photograph.  
G button N retouch menu  
Red-Eye Correction  
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is available only with  
photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction  
can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and  
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that red-eye correction may  
not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be  
applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview  
thoroughly before proceeding.  
To  
Use  
X
Description  
Zoom in  
Zoom out  
Press X button to zoom in, W (Q) button to zoom out. While photo  
is zoomed in, use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in  
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas  
of frame. Navigation window is displayed when zoom buttons or  
multi selector is pressed; area currently visible in monitor is indicated  
by yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom.  
W (Q)  
View other  
areas of image  
Cancel zoom  
Create copy  
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected photograph, a copy will  
be created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No copy  
will be created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.  
180  
       
G button N retouch menu  
Trim  
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The  
selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown  
in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following  
table.  
To  
Use  
X
Description  
Increase size of crop  
Reduce size of crop  
Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.  
Press the W (Q) button to reduce the size of the crop.  
W (Q)  
Change crop aspect  
ratio  
Rotate the command dial to switch between aspect ratios of  
3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.  
Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the  
image.  
Move crop  
Create copy  
Save the current crop as a separate file.  
A Trim: Image Quality and Size  
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an  
image quality of JPEG fine (0 42); cropped copies created from JPEG  
photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the  
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left  
in the crop display.  
A Viewing Cropped Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.  
G button N retouch menu  
Monochrome  
Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or  
Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome).  
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview  
of the selected image; press 1 to increase color  
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J to create a  
monochrome copy.  
Increase  
saturation  
Decrease  
saturation  
181  
           
G button N retouch menu  
Filter Effects  
Choose from the following filter effects. After adjusting filter effects as described  
below, press J to copy the photograph.  
Option  
Description  
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the  
picture less blue. The effect can be previewed in  
the monitor as shown at right.  
Skylight  
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving  
the copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be  
previewed in the monitor.  
Warm filter  
Red intensifier  
Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green  
Green intensifier intensifier), or blues (Blue intensifier). Press 1 to  
increase the effect, 3 to decrease.  
Blue intensifier  
Add starburst effects to light sources.  
Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.  
Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light  
sources affected.  
Cross screen  
Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.  
Length of points: Choose the length of points.  
Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter as shown  
at right. Press X to preview the copy full frame.  
Save: Create a retouched copy.  
Add a soft filter effect. Press 1 or 3 to choose the  
filter strength.  
Soft  
182  
                 
G button N retouch menu  
Color Balance  
Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color  
balance as shown below. The effect is displayed in the monitor  
together with red, green, and blue histograms (0 120) giving  
the distribution of tones in the copy.  
Increase amount of green  
Create retouched copy  
Increase amount of  
Increase amount of amber  
blue  
Increase amount of magenta  
A Zoom  
To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press the X  
button. The histogram will be updated to show data only for the  
portion of the image displayed in the monitor. While the image is  
zoomed in, press the A (L) button to toggle back and forth  
between color balance and zoom. When zoom is selected, you can  
zoom in and out with the X and W (Q) buttons and scroll the image  
with the multi selector.  
183  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Image Overlay  
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single  
picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW  
data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an  
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size  
settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (042, 44; all options  
are available). To create an NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).  
+
1 Select Image overlay.  
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu  
and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed, with  
Image 1 highlighted; press J to display a list of  
the NEF (RAW) pictures created with this camera.  
2 Select the first image.  
Use the multi selector to highlight the first  
photograph in the overlay. To view the  
highlighted photograph full frame, press and  
hold the X button. Press J to select the  
highlighted photograph and return to the  
preview display.  
184  
   
3 Select the second image.  
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press J,  
then select the second photo as described in Step 2.  
4 Adjust gain.  
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize  
exposure for the overlay by pressing 1or 3to  
select gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0.  
Repeat for the second image. The default value is  
1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The  
effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.  
5 Preview the overlay.  
Press 4or 2to place the cursor in the Preview  
column and press 1or 3to highlight Overlay.  
Press J to preview the overlay as shown at right  
(to save the overlay without displaying a preview,  
select Save). To return to Step 4 and select new  
photos or adjust gain, press W (Q).  
6 Save the overlay.  
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the  
overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting  
image will be displayed full-frame in the monitor.  
D Image Overlay  
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed,  
aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and  
values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1.  
185  
 
G button N retouch menu  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.  
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.  
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch  
menu and press 2to display a picture selection  
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with  
this camera.  
2 Select a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph  
(to view the highlighted photograph full frame,  
press and hold the X button). Press J to select  
the highlighted photograph and proceed to the  
next step.  
3 Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.  
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance is not available with  
pictures created with multiple exposure or image overlay, and that exposure  
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and +2 EV.  
Image quality (042)  
Image size (044)  
White balance (076)  
Exposure compensation (065)  
Picture Control (086)  
High ISO NR (0153)  
Color space (0152)  
D-Lighting (0180)  
4 Copy the photograph.  
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy  
of the selected photograph. The resulting image  
will be displayed full-frame in the monitor. To exit  
without copying the photograph, press the G  
button.  
186  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Resize  
Create small copies of selected photographs.  
1 Select Resize.  
To resize selected images, press G to display  
the menus and select Resize in the retouch  
menu.  
2 Choose a size.  
Highlight Choose size and press 2.  
The options shown at right will be displayed;  
highlight an option and press J.  
3 Choose pictures.  
Highlight Select image and press 2.  
Highlight pictures using the multi selector  
and press the W (Q) button to select or  
deselect (to view the highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X button).  
Selected pictures are marked by a 1 icon.  
Press J when the selection is complete.  
W (Q) button  
4 Save the resized copies.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
Highlight Yes and press J to save the resized  
copies.  
187  
   
A Viewing Resized Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.  
A Image Quality  
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an image quality (042) of  
JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original.  
G button N retouch menu  
Quick Retouch  
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast.  
D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit  
subjects.  
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of enhancement. The effect  
can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the  
photograph.  
G button N retouch menu  
Straighten  
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2to  
rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments  
of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4to rotate it counterclockwise  
(the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that edges  
of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press J  
to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without  
creating a copy.  
G button N retouch menu  
Distortion Control  
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto  
to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then  
make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select  
Manual to reduce distortion manually (note that Auto is not  
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see  
page 151). Press 2to reduce barrel distortion, 4to reduce pin-  
cushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that greater  
amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press  
J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.  
D Auto  
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain  
other lenses excluded). Results are not guaranteed with other lenses.  
188  
           
G button N retouch menu  
Fisheye  
Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye  
lens. Press 2to increase the effect (this also increases the  
amount that will be cropped out at the edges of the image), 4  
to reduce it. The effect can be previewed in the edit display.  
Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback  
without creating a copy.  
G button N retouch menu  
Color Outline  
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for  
painting. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press  
J to copy the photograph.  
Before  
After  
G button N retouch menu  
Color Sketch  
Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made  
with colored pencils. Press 1or 3to highlight Vividness or  
Outlines and press 4or 2to change. Vividness can be  
increased to make colors more saturated, or decreased for a  
washed-out, monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made  
thicker or thinner. Thicker outlines make colors more saturated.  
The results can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph, or  
press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.  
189  
           
G button N retouch menu  
Perspective Control  
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from  
the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust  
perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control  
result in more of the edges being cropped out). The results can  
be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the  
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a  
copy.  
Before  
After  
190  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Miniature Effect  
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works best with photos taken  
from a high vantage point. The area that will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a  
yellow frame.  
To  
Press  
Description  
Choose  
orientation  
W (Q) Press W (Q) to choose orientation of area that is in focus.  
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 1or  
3 to position frame showing area of copy that  
will be in focus.  
Choose area  
in focus  
Area in focus  
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 4or 2  
to position frame showing area of copy that will  
be in focus.  
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4or 2to choose height.  
Choose size  
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1or 3to choose width.  
Preview copy  
Cancel  
X
Preview copy.  
Exit to full-frame playback without creating copy.  
K
Create copy  
Create copy.  
191  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Selective Color  
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.  
1 Select Selective color.  
Highlight Selective color in the retouch menu  
and press 2to display a picture selection dialog.  
2 Select a photograph.  
Highlight a photograph (to view the highlighted  
photograph full frame, press and hold the X  
button). Press J to select the highlighted  
photograph and proceed to the next step.  
Selected color  
3 Select a color.  
Use the multi selector to position the cursor  
over an object and press A (L) to select  
the color of the object as one that will  
remain in the final copy (the camera may  
have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors;  
choose a saturated color). To zoom in on the  
picture for precise color selection, press X.  
Press W (Q) to zoom out.  
A (L) button  
Color range  
4 Highlight the color range.  
Rotate the command dial to highlight the color  
range for the selected color.  
192  
   
5 Choose the color range.  
Press 1or 3to increase or decrease the range of  
similar hues that will be included in the final  
photograph or movie. Choose from values  
between 1 and 7; note that higher values may  
include hues from other colors. The effect can be  
previewed in the edit display.  
6 Select additional colors.  
To select additional colors, rotate the command  
dial to highlight another of the three color boxes  
at the top of the display and repeat Steps 3–5 to  
select another color. Repeat for a third color if  
desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press  
O (To remove all colors, press and hold O. A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; select Yes).  
7 Save the edited copy.  
Press J to copy the photograph.  
193  
Side-by-side Comparison  
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option is only available  
if the J button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is  
played back full frame.  
1 Select a picture.  
Select a retouched copy (shown by a N icon) or a  
photograph that has been retouched in full-  
frame playback and press J.  
2 Select Side-by-side comparison.  
Highlight Side-by-side comparison in the  
retouch menu and press J.  
Options used to create  
3 Compare the copy with the original.  
copy  
The source image is displayed on the left, the  
retouched copy on the right, with the options  
used to create the copy listed at the top of the  
display. Press 4or 2to switch between the  
source image and the retouched copy. To view  
the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold  
the X button. If the copy was created from two  
images using Image overlay, press 1or 3to  
view the other source image. If multiple copies  
Source Retouched  
image copy  
exist for the current source image, press 1or 3to view the other copies. To  
exit to playback mode, press the K button, or press J to return to playback  
with the highlighted image displayed.  
D Side-by-side comparison  
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has  
since been deleted or that was protected when the copy was made (0126).  
194  
   
m Recent Settings/O My Menu  
To display the recent settings menu, press G and select the m (recent settings) tab.  
G button  
The recent settings menu lists the 20 most recently used  
settings, with the most recently-used items first. Press 1or 3to  
highlight an option and press 2to select.  
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu  
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and  
press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O  
again to delete the selected item.  
My Menu  
To access a customized menu of up to 20 options selected from the playback,  
shooting, Custom Settings, and setup menus, select O My Menu for m Recent  
settings > Choose tab.  
1 Select Choose tab.  
In the recent settings menu (m), highlight  
Choose tab and press 2.  
2 Select O My Menu.  
Highlight O My Menu and press J. The  
name of the menu will change from “RECENT  
SETTINGS” to “MY MENU.”  
To view recent settings again, select m Recent settings for O My Menu > Choose  
tab.  
195  
       
Adding Options to My Menu  
1 Select Add items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Add items and  
press 2.  
2 Select a menu.  
Highlight the name of the menu containing  
the option you wish to add and press 2.  
3 Select an item.  
Highlight the desired menu item and press  
J.  
4 Position the new item.  
Press 1or 3to move the new item up or  
down in My Menu. Press J to add the new  
item.  
5 Add more items.  
The items currently displayed in My Menu  
are indicated by a check mark. Items  
indicated by a V icon can not be selected.  
Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional items.  
196  
 
Deleting Options from My Menu  
1 Select Remove items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.  
2 Select items.  
Highlight items and press 2to select or  
deselect. Selected items are indicated by a  
check mark.  
3 Delete the selected items.  
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; press J again to delete the  
selected items.  
A Deleting Items in My Menu  
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button. A confirmation  
dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the selected item from My Menu.  
197  
 
Reordering Options in My Menu  
1 Select Rank items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.  
2 Select an item.  
Highlight the item you wish to move and  
press J.  
3 Position the item.  
Press 1or 3to move the item up or down  
in My Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3  
to reposition additional items.  
4 Exit to My Menu.  
Press the G button to return to My Menu.  
G button  
198  
 
Technical Notes  
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing  
the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter  
problems using the camera.  
Compatible Lenses  
Compatible CPU Lenses  
This camera supports autofocus with AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses only. AF-S lenses have  
names beginning with AF-S, AF-I lenses names beginning with AF-I. Autofocus is not  
supported with other autofocus (AF) lenses. The following table lists the features  
available with compatible lenses in viewfinder photography:  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
Metering  
L
MF (with electronic  
rangefinder)  
z
M
N
Lens/accessory  
AF  
z
MF  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
M
z
z
z3  
z
z
z
z
Other modes 3D Color  
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR1  
z
z
z2  
z2  
z2, 3  
z2, 3  
z2  
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR1  
PC-E NIKKOR series  
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D4  
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter5  
z6  
z
z
z
z3  
z3  
z6  
z7  
z8  
z3  
z
z3  
z
z
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF)  
AI-P NIKKOR  
z
z2  
z
z2  
1 Use AF-S or AF-I lenses to get the most from your camera. Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR  
lenses.  
2 Spot metering meters selected focus point (062).  
3 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems may not function as expected when the  
lens is shifted and/or tilted or an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.  
5 AF-S or AF-I lens required.  
6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
7 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5  
lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator may be  
displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Focus manually until  
image in viewfinder is in focus.  
8 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
D IX NIKKOR Lenses  
IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used.  
A Lens f-number  
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.  
199  
             
A Identifying CPU and Type G and D Lenses  
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter  
on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.  
CPU contacts  
Aperture ring  
CPU lens  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
200  
         
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode M. Selecting another  
mode disables the shutter release. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens  
aperture ring and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other features  
requiring a CPU lens can not be used. Some non-CPU lenses can not be used; see  
“Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses,” below.  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
Metering  
MF (with electronic  
Lens/accessory  
AF  
rangefinder)  
MF  
z
z
z
z
z
z
M
Other modes L, M, N  
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses  
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4  
Reflex NIKKOR  
PC NIKKOR  
AI-type Teleconverter  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 6  
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;  
PN-11)  
z1  
z2  
z2, 3  
z2  
z2  
z2  
z2  
z
z4  
z5  
z1  
z1  
z
z2  
1 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
2 Exposure indicator can not be used.  
3 Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.  
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
5 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
6 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).  
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D5200:  
TC-16AS AF teleconverter  
Non-AI lenses  
Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,  
1200mm f/11)  
Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)  
2.1cm f/4  
Extension Ring K2  
180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)  
360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)  
200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)  
AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)  
PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)  
PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)  
PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)  
Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)  
201  
     
D The Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm, although in  
some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal  
lengths due to shadows cast by the lens, while lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-  
eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent  
shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m and can not be used in the macro range  
of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following  
lenses at ranges less than those given below:  
Lens  
Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR  
24 mm  
24 mm  
35 mm  
24–85 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
28 mm  
35 mm  
45–55 mm  
24 mm  
28–35 mm  
18 mm  
24–70 mm  
18 mm  
24 mm  
18 mm  
24–135 mm  
24 mm  
35–200 mm  
35–300 mm  
24 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
3.0 m/ 9 ft 10in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED,  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF  
AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.4G ED  
24 mm  
35 mm  
50–70 mm  
24 mm  
28–120 mm  
24 mm  
35 mm  
50–70 mm  
28 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
35 mm  
202  
 
Lens  
Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting  
250 mm  
350 mm  
200 mm  
250 mm  
300 mm  
350–400 mm  
24 mm  
2.5 m/8 ft 2in.  
2.0 m/6 ft 7 in.  
5.0 m/16 ft 5 in.  
3.0 m/9 ft 10 in.  
2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II  
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED *  
* When not shifted or tilted.  
3.0 m/9 ft 10 in.  
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the  
entire subject at all ranges.  
D AF-Assist Illumination  
AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:  
AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II  
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and  
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G  
IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.4G  
AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
A Calculating Angle of View  
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed  
by the D5200, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm, meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm  
camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D5200. The approximate focal length of lenses  
for the D5200 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens  
by about 1.5.  
Picture size (35mm format)  
(36 × 24 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D5200)  
(23.5 × 15.6 mm)  
Angle of view (35mm format)  
Angle of view (D5200)  
203  
     
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)  
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with  
CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units can be attached directly to the  
camera accessory shoe as described below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a  
safety lock for flash units with a locking pin.  
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.  
2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe.  
See the manual provided with the flash unit for details.  
The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is  
attached.  
A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter  
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera  
accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.  
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory  
shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera  
or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized  
service representative for more information.  
204  
     
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication  
between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography.  
Refer to the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.  
CLS-Compatible Flash Units  
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units:  
Flash unit  
Feature  
SB-910 1  
34/111  
48/157  
SB-900 1  
34/111  
48/157  
SB-800  
38/125  
53/174  
SB-700 1  
28/92  
39/128  
SB-600  
30/98  
42/138  
SB-400 2  
21/69  
30/98  
SB-R200 3  
10/33  
14/46  
ISO 100  
ISO 200  
Guide No. 4  
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when AUTO or N (flash) is selected for white  
balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.  
2 Wireless flash control is not available with the SB-400.  
3 Controlled remotely using optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit or SU-800 wireless  
Speedlight commander.  
4 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-910,  
SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.  
The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a CLS-compatible  
camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-910, SB-900,  
SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800  
itself is not equipped with a flash.  
A Guide Number  
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture.  
For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft (35 mm zoom head  
position); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,  
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the  
Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).  
205  
   
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units:  
CLS-compatible flash units  
SU-800  
SB-910  
Close-up  
SB-900 SB-800 SB-700 SB-600 Commander photography SB-R200 SB-400  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for  
digital SLR 1  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital  
SLR  
z
z
z
z
z
i-TTL  
z 2  
z 2  
z
z 2  
z
AA Auto aperture  
Non-TTL auto  
GN Distance-priority manual  
Manual  
RPT Repeating flash  
Remote flash control  
i-TTL i-TTL  
z 3  
z 3  
z
z
z
z
z
z 5  
z
z
z
z
z
z 5  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z 3  
z 3  
z
z
z
z
z
z 5  
z
z
z
z
z
z 5  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z4  
z
A
M
z
z
[A:B] Quick wireless flash control  
AA Auto aperture  
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
RPT Repeating flash  
i-TTL i-TTL  
[A:B] Quick wireless flash control  
AA Auto aperture  
z
z
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
RPT Repeating flash  
Flash Color Information Communication  
AF-assist for multi-area AF  
Red-eye reduction  
Camera flash mode selection  
Camera flash unit firmware update  
z
z
1 Not available with spot metering.  
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.  
3
AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. A is selected when a non-CPU lens  
is used.  
4 Can only be selected with camera (0164).  
5 When a non-CPU lens is used, non-TTL auto (A) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.  
206  
Other Flash Units  
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes.  
SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-22S, SB-23, SB-29 3,  
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B 3, SB-29S 3  
Flash unit  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28,  
SB-26, SB-25, SB-24  
Flash mode  
SB-50DX 1  
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
G
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4  
1 Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.  
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto  
flash).  
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm  
f/2.8G ED lenses only.  
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.  
207  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer  
to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D5200 is not included in the  
“digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.  
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %, and 3, the flash will  
fire with every shot, even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used.  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400. At values over  
6400, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the  
flash-ready indicator flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash  
has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed.  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct  
exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot  
metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the  
monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other  
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.  
If the controls on the optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or SB-600 flash unit or SU-800  
wireless Speedlight commander are used to set flash compensation, Y will appear in the  
information display.  
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the  
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the  
following restrictions:  
SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist  
illumination is available with 17–  
135 mm AF lenses, however,  
autofocus is available only with the  
focus points shown at right.  
SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist  
illumination is available with 24–  
105 mm AF lenses, however,  
autofocus is available only with the  
focus points shown at right.  
SB-700: AF-assist illumination is  
available with 24–135 mm AF  
lenses, however, autofocus is  
available only with the focus points  
shown at right.  
17–19 mm  
24–34 mm  
20–105 mm  
35–49 mm  
24–135 mm  
106–135 mm  
50–105 mm  
208  
     
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D5200.  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 (014): Additional EN-EL14 batteries are  
available from local retailers and Nikon-authorized service representatives.  
Battery Charger MH-24 (014): Recharge EN-EL14 batteries.  
Power Connector EP-5A, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories can be used to power  
the camera for extended periods (EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also be  
used). A power connector EP-5A is required to connect the camera to the  
EH-5b, EH-5a, or EH-5; see page 212 for details.  
Power  
sources  
Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus  
or the electronic rangefinder.  
The D5200 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use C-PL or C-PL II  
circular polarizing filters instead.  
NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens.  
Filters  
To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is  
framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.  
Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors  
(filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,  
ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for details.  
DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3,  
–2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is  
in the neutral position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the  
desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control  
(–1.7 to +0.7 m–1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure  
that the desired focus can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used  
with eyepiece correction lenses.  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the  
viewfinder for greater precision during focusing. Eyepiece adapter required  
(available separately).  
Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier.  
Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the  
viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at  
right angles to the lens (for example, from directly above when the camera is  
horizontal).  
Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package offering such features as white  
balance adjustment and color control points.  
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer to record  
movies and photographs and save photographs directly to the computer hard  
disk.  
Software  
Body cap  
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an  
auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet. See the  
websites listed on page xv for the latest information on supported operating  
systems.  
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen,  
and low-pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place.  
209  
                           
Wireless Remote Control ML-L3 (031): The ML-L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery.  
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q), insert a fingernail into the  
gap and open the battery chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in  
the correct orientation (r).  
Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10 */WR-T10: When a WR-R10 wireless remote  
controller is attached, the camera can be controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10  
wireless remote controller (032, 175).  
Remote  
controls/  
wireless  
remote  
controller  
Insert a fingernail into the gap behind the battery-chamber latch and open the  
battery chamber (q). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct  
orientation (e).  
Microphones Stereo Microphone ME-1 (0104)*  
The D5200 is equipped with an accessory terminal for  
WR-R10 wireless remote controllers (0175), MC-DC2 remote  
cords (060), and GP-1 GPS units (0175), which connect  
with the 4mark on the connector aligned with the 2  
next to the accessory terminal (close the connector  
cover when the terminal is not in use).  
Accessory  
terminal  
accessories  
USB and A/V  
connector  
accessories  
UC-E17 and UC-E6 USB cables (0134)  
Wireless Mobile Adapter WU-1a *: Supports two-way communication between the  
camera and smart devices running the Wireless Mobile Adapter Utility.  
* The WR-R10 wireless remote controller can not be attached at the same time as a WU-1a  
wireless mobile adapter or ME-1 stereo microphone. Attempting to forcibly attach  
accessories can damage the camera or accessory.  
210  
             
Approved Memory Cards  
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D5200.  
Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended for movie recording.  
Recording may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.  
SD memory cards  
SDHC memory cards 2  
SDXC memory cards 3  
SanDisk  
Toshiba  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
64 GB  
Panasonic  
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB, 16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB 48 GB, 64 GB  
2 GB 1  
Lexar Media  
Platinum II  
Professional  
Full-HD Video  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
64 GB, 128 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards.  
2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC-compliant. The  
camera supports UHS-1.  
3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are  
SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-1.  
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please  
contact the manufacturer.  
211  
   
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter  
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.  
1 Ready the camera.  
Open the battery-chamber (q) and power connector (w)  
covers.  
2 Insert the EP-5A power connector.  
Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation shown,  
using the connector to keep the orange battery latch  
pressed to one side. The latch locks the connector in place  
when the connector is fully inserted.  
3 Close the battery-chamber cover.  
Position the power connector cable so that it passes  
through the power connector slot and close the battery-  
chamber cover.  
4 Connect the AC adapter.  
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter (e) and  
the EP-5A power cable to the DC socket (r). A P icon is displayed in the  
monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.  
212  
     
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and  
store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or  
mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera  
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:  
are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After  
Camera  
body  
using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly  
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign  
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.  
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If  
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To  
remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft  
cloth and clean with care.  
Lens,  
mirror, and  
viewfinder  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,  
wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,  
as this could result in damage or malfunction.  
Monitor  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the  
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative once  
every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees  
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if  
the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as  
lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.  
213  
       
The Low-Pass Filter  
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass  
filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in  
photographs, you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the  
setup menu. The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or  
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.  
“Clean Now”  
1 Place the camera base down.  
Image sensor cleaning is most effective when  
the camera is placed base down as shown at  
right.  
2 Select Clean image sensor in the setup  
menu.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup  
menu (0167) and press 2.  
G button  
3 Select Clean now.  
Highlight Clean now and press J.  
The camera will check the image sensor and then  
begin cleaning. 1 flashes in the viewfinder  
and other operations can not be performed. Do  
not remove or disconnect the power source until  
cleaning is complete and the message shown at  
right is no longer displayed.  
214  
         
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”  
Choose from the following options:  
Option  
Description  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is  
turned on.  
5 Clean at startup  
Clean at  
6
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each  
time the camera is turned off.  
shutdown  
Clean at startup & The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at  
7
shutdown  
shutdown.  
Cleaning off  
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.  
1 Select Clean image sensor in the setup  
menu.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup  
menu (0167) and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select Clean at startup/shutdown.  
Highlight Clean at startup/shutdown and  
press 2.  
3 Select an option.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning. Image sensor  
cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is charging.  
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter. If dust can not be fully removed using  
the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0216) or  
consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.  
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning  
may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be  
performed again after a short wait.  
215  
Manual Cleaning  
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using the Clean image  
sensor option in the setup menu (0214), the filter can be cleaned manually as  
described below. Note, however, that the filter is extremely delicate and easily  
damaged. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized  
service personnel.  
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.  
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low-pass  
filter. Turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL14 battery or connect  
an optional EP-5A power connector and EH-5b AC adapter.  
2 Remove the lens.  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.  
Turn the camera on and press the G  
button to display the menus. Highlight Lock  
mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu  
and press 2(note that this option is not  
available at battery levels of H or below).  
G button  
4 Press J.  
The message shown at right will be displayed in the  
monitor. To restore normal operation without inspecting  
the low-pass filter, turn the camera off.  
5 Raise the mirror.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The  
mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open,  
revealing the low-pass filter.  
6 Examine the low-pass filter.  
Holding the camera so that light falls on the low-pass filter,  
examine the filter for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are  
present, proceed to Step 8.  
216  
       
7 Clean the filter.  
Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower. Do  
not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage the  
filter. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only  
be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the  
filter.  
8 Turn the camera off.  
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.  
Replace the lens or body cap.  
A Use a Reliable Power Source  
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror  
is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the  
following precautions:  
Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is  
raised.  
If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp  
will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after  
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.  
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact  
with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D5200, however, is designed to  
be used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses  
are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the  
low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To  
protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with  
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be  
adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter as described  
above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs  
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2  
(available separately; 0209) or the clean image options available in some third-party  
imaging applications.  
217  
 
Caring for the Camera and Battery:  
Cautions  
Caring for the Camera  
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.  
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed  
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur  
when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the  
device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before  
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment  
that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or  
the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the  
monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light  
source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or  
produce a white blur effect in photographs.  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or  
remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.  
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to  
product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid  
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected.  
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then  
wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any  
sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.  
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower.  
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove  
fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth  
and wipe the lens carefully.  
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0214, 216) for information on cleaning the low-pass filter.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under  
no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or  
subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear  
the curtain.  
218  
     
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you are  
using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an  
extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag  
containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may  
cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb  
moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the  
camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.  
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery  
away.  
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of  
pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these  
displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),  
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.  
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint  
on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a  
soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury  
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes and mouth.  
Moiré: Moiré is an interference pattern created by the interaction of an image containing a  
regular, repeating grid, such as the pattern of weave in cloth or windows in a building, with the  
camera image sensor grid. If you notice moiré in your photographs, try changing the distance  
to the subject, zooming in and out, or changing the angle between the subject and the  
camera.  
Caring for the Battery  
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when  
handling batteries:  
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.  
Keep the battery terminals clean.  
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.  
Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal  
cover. These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the  
battery down to the point that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for  
some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing it in a location  
with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold  
locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.  
Turning the camera on and off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten  
battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use.  
219  
 
The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use. Attempting to  
charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery  
performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery  
to cool before charging.  
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.  
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room  
temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new EN-EL14 battery.  
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a  
spare EN-EL14 battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be  
difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the  
capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking  
photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange  
the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local regulations.  
220  
 
Available Settings  
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode.  
x, y,  
z, 0,  
k,p, l, m,  
S, A, n,o, r, t,  
3,1,  
i
z
z
z
z
z
z
j
z
z
P
z
M
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
s
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
u, v w  
%
z
z
z
z
g ( 2, 3  
Image quality 2  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Image size 2  
z
White balance 2  
z  
z  
Set Picture Control 2  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
z
z
z
z
Active D-Lighting 2  
HDR (high dynamic range) 2  
Long exposure NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings 2  
Release mode 2  
Multiple exposure 2  
Interval timer shooting  
Movie settings  
Focus mode (viewfinder)  
AF-area mode (viewfinder)  
Focus mode (live view/movie)  
AF-area mode (live view/movie)  
AE-L/AF-L button hold  
Flexible program  
z  
z  
z
z
z  
z  
z  
z
z
z  
z 3 z 3  
z
z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3  
z
z
z
z  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z  
z
z
z 3  
z 3 z 3  
z 3 z 3 z 3  
z 3  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z 3  
z  
z  
z  
z  
z  
z  
z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3  
z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3 z 3  
z 3  
z 3  
z 3  
z 3  
Metering  
Exposure compensation  
Bracketing  
Flash mode  
Flash compensation  
z 3 z  
z  
221  
   
x, y,  
z, 0,  
k,p, l, m,  
S, A, n,o, r, t,  
3,1,  
i
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
j
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
P
M
s
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
u, v w  
%
z
z
g ( 2, 3  
a1: AF-C priority selection  
a2: Number of focus points  
a3: Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a4: Rangefinder  
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl  
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2: Auto off timers  
c3: Self-timer  
c4: Remote on duration (ML-L3)  
d1: Beep  
d2: Viewfinder grid display  
d3: ISO display  
d4: File number sequence  
d5: Exposure delay mode  
d6: Print date  
e1: Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e2: Auto bracketing set  
f1: Assign Fn button  
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f3: Reverse dial rotation  
f4: Slot empty release lock  
f5: Reverse indicators  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z  
z  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
1 Reset with Reset shooting menu (0150).  
2 Reset with two-button reset (053). Individual settings for multiple exposure are  
unaffected.  
3 Reset when mode dial is rotated to new setting.  
4 Reset with Reset custom settings (0156).  
222  
Exposure Program (Mode P)  
The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph:  
F (lens focal length) 55 mm  
55 mm < F 135 mm  
135 mm < F  
f1  
f1.4  
f2  
f2.8  
f4  
f5.6  
f8  
f11  
f16  
f22  
f32  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
8
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2
4
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000  
Shutter speed (seconds)  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph  
assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent. When matrix metering is used,  
values over 161/3 EV are reduced to 161/3 EV.  
223  
   
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below  
before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative.  
Battery/Display  
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the problem persists, turn the  
camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using  
an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data  
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be affected  
by removing or disconnecting the power source.  
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece correction lenses  
(017, 209).  
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers;  
0160).  
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If  
information display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutter-release  
button, confirm that On is selected for Auto info display (0171) and that battery is charged.  
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness of this display vary  
with temperature.  
Shooting (All Modes)  
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (015, 18, 20).  
Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f4 (Slot empty release lock; 0166) and no  
memory card is inserted (015).  
Built-in flash is charging (023).  
Camera is not in focus (022).  
CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f-number (0200).  
Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (0201).  
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting mode: Continuous  
shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (030, 45).  
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage  
is approximately 95%.  
Photos are out of focus:  
AF-S or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S or AF-I lens or focus manually.  
Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock (034, 38, 40).  
Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually (040).  
224  
       
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A (L) button to lock focus  
when live view is off and AF-C is selected for focus mode or when photographing moving  
subjects in AF-A mode (038).  
Can not select focus point:  
e (Auto-area AF; 036) is selected: choose another AF-area mode.  
Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (023).  
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (040, 95).  
Image size can not be changed: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image quality (043).  
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0153).  
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:  
Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise reduction on (0153).  
Shutter speed is slower than 1 s: use long exposure noise reduction (0153).  
Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise (070).  
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:  
Replace battery in remote control (0210).  
Choose remote control release mode (031).  
Flash is charging (023).  
Time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration (ML-L3), 0161) has elapsed.  
Bright light is interfering with ML-L3 remote control.  
Beep does not sound:  
Off is selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0161).  
Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode (029), or movie is being recorded (0101).  
MF or AF-C is selected as the focus mode or subject moves when AF-A is selected (033).  
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem persists, perform  
image sensor cleaning (0214).  
Date is not imprinted on photos: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image quality (043, 163).  
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie settings > Microphone  
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for Flicker reduction  
that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply (0172).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.  
225  
Shooting (P, S, A, M)  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (0201).  
Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” selected in mode M: choose  
new shutter speed (057).  
Full range of shutter speeds not available:  
Flash in use (048).  
When On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings in the shooting menu,  
the range of available shutter speed varies with the frame rate (0104).  
Colors are unnatural:  
Adjust white balance to match light source (076).  
Adjust Set Picture Control settings (086).  
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (080).  
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created with D5200 (082).  
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or  
saturation. For consistent results over a series of photos, choose another setting (088).  
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (063).  
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose mode P, S, or A (055, 65).  
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Turn long-exposure noise  
reduction on (0153).  
Playback  
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF (RAW)+JPEG (043).  
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is  
automatically selected after photograph is taken (0148).  
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:  
Select On for Rotate tall (0149).  
Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0174).  
Photo is displayed in image review (0149).  
Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0174).  
Can not delete picture:  
Picture is protected: remove protection (0126).  
Memory card is locked (018).  
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera (0178).  
226  
   
Can not change print order:  
Memory card is full: delete pictures (020, 127).  
Memory card is locked (018).  
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW)  
processing or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX 2 (0134,  
Picture is not displayed on TV:  
Choose correct video mode (0172) or output resolution (0147).  
A/V (0145) or HDMI (0146) cable is not correctly connected.  
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:  
Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0147).  
Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with  
the device.  
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card  
reader to copy photos to computer (0133).  
Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0209).  
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the  
position of dust on the low-pass filter. Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image  
sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor  
cleaning is performed. Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is  
performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is  
performed (0171).  
Miscellaneous  
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (016, 173).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings  
or when no memory card is inserted (015, 178, 221).  
227  
 
Error Messages  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder and  
monitor.  
A Warning Icons  
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a warning or error message  
can be displayed in the monitor by pressing the W (Q) button.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Lock lens aperture ring at  
minimum aperture (largest  
f/-number).  
B
Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture  
19,  
(flashes) (highest f-number).  
Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens.  
If non-CPU lens is attached, select mode M.  
F/s  
(flashes)  
Lens not attached  
Shutter release disabled.  
Recharge battery.  
d/s  
(flashes) battery.  
Turn camera off and recharge or replace  
This battery cannot be used.  
Choose battery designated  
for use in this camera.  
Initialization error. Turn  
camera off and then on  
again.  
Battery level is low.  
Complete operation and turn  
camera off immediately.  
d
(flashes)  
Use Nikon-approved battery.  
d/k Turn camera off, remove and replace battery,  
(flashes) and then turn camera on again.  
End cleaning and turn camera off and  
recharge or replace battery.  
16,  
Clock not set  
Set camera clock.  
S/s  
(flashes) correctly inserted.  
Turn camera off and confirm that card is  
No SD card inserted  
Memory card is locked.  
(
Memory card is locked (write protected). Slide  
Slide lock to “write” position. (flashes) card write-protect switch to “write” position.  
Use approved card.  
Format card. If problem persists, card may  
be damaged. Contact Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
This memory card cannot be  
used. Card may be damaged.  
Insert another card.  
Error creating new folder. Delete files or  
insert new memory card.  
Insert new memory card.  
(/k  
(flashes)  
Eye-Fi card is still emitting wireless signal  
after Disable has been selected for Eye-Fi  
upload. To terminate wireless transmission,  
turn the camera off and remove the card.  
228  
       
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Not available if Eye-Fi card is  
locked.  
(/k Eye-Fi card is locked (write protected). Slide  
(flashes) card write-protect switch to “write” position.  
This card is not formatted.  
Format the card.  
T
Format card or turn camera off and insert new 15,  
(flashes) memory card.  
Reduce quality or size.  
Delete photographs.  
Insert new memory card.  
j/A/s  
(flashes)  
Card is full  
Camera can not focus using autofocus.  
22,  
(flashes) Change composition or focus manually.  
Use a lower ISO sensitivity.  
Use commercial ND filter.  
In mode:  
Subject is too bright  
Subject is too dark  
S
A
Increase shutter speed  
Choose a smaller aperture (higher  
f-number)  
s
% Choose another shooting mode  
Use a higher ISO sensitivity.  
Use flash.  
In mode:  
S
(flashes)  
Lower shutter speed  
Choose a larger aperture (lower  
f-number)  
A
A
(flashes)  
A
No Bulb in S mode  
Change shutter speed or select mode M.  
Change shutter speed.  
Turn HDR off.  
No Bulb in HDR mode  
(flashes)  
Menus and playback are not available while  
Interval timer shooting  
interval timer photography is in progress. Turn 51  
camera off.  
Flash has fired at full power. Check photo in  
monitor; if underexposed, adjust settings and  
try again.  
N
(flashes)  
Use the flash.  
Change distance to subject, aperture, flash 48,  
range, or ISO sensitivity.  
Lens focal length is less than 18 mm: use a  
longer focal length.  
(flashes) Optional SB-400 flash unit attached: flash is  
in bounce position or focus distance is very  
short. Continue shooting; if necessary,  
N/s  
increase focus distance to prevent shadows  
from appearing in photograph.  
Error occurred updating firmware for optional  
flash unit. Contact Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
s
Flash error  
(flashes)  
229  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Release shutter. If error persists or appears  
frequently, consult Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Error. Press shutter release  
button again.  
O
(flashes)  
Start-up error. Contact a  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Consult Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Metering error  
Unable to start live view.  
Please wait for camera to  
cool.  
Wait for the internal circuits to cool before  
resuming live view or movie recording.  
99,  
Folder selected for playback contains no  
images. Insert another memory card or select  
a different folder.  
15,  
Folder contains no images.  
Cannot display this file.  
Cannot select this file.  
File can not be played back on camera.  
Images created with other devices can not be  
retouched.  
Memory card does not contain NEF (RAW)  
images for use with NEF (RAW) processing.  
Check printer. To resume, select Continue (if  
available).  
No image for retouching.  
Check printer.  
*
Paper is not selected size. Insert paper of  
correct size and select Continue.  
Clear jam and select Continue.  
Insert paper of selected size and select  
Continue.  
*
Check paper.  
Paper jam.  
*
*
Out of paper.  
*
Check ink supply.  
Out of ink.  
Check ink. To resume, select Continue.  
Replace ink and select Continue.  
*
* See printer manual for more information.  
230  
Specifications  
Nikon D5200 Digital Camera  
Type  
Type  
Lens mount  
Single-lens reflex digital camera  
Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)  
Effective angle of view Nikon DX format; focal length equivalent to approx. 1.5× that of lenses  
with FX format angle of view  
Effective pixels  
Effective pixels  
24.1 million  
Image sensor  
Image sensor  
Total pixels  
23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor  
24.71 million  
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional  
Capture NX 2 software required)  
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
6000 × 4000 (Large)  
4496 × 3000 (Medium)  
2992 × 2000 (Small)  
File format  
NEF (RAW): 14 bit, compressed  
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.  
1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and  
JPEG formats  
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape; selected  
Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls  
Media  
File system  
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards  
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order  
Format), Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras)  
2.3, PictBridge  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex viewfinder  
Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Eyepoint  
Diopter adjustment  
Focusing screen  
Reflex mirror  
Lens aperture  
Approx. 0.78 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1  
)
17.9 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens)  
–1.7–+0.7 m–1  
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VII screen  
Quick return  
Instant return, electronically controlled  
231  
     
Lens  
Compatible lenses  
Autofocus is available with AF-S and AF-I lenses. Autofocus is not  
available with other type G and D lenses, AF lenses (IX NIKKOR and lenses  
for the F3AF are not supported), and AI-P lenses. Non-CPU lenses can be  
used in mode M, but the camera exposure meter will not function.  
The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a  
maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
Shutter  
Type  
Speed  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter  
1/4000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV; Bulb; Time (requires optional ML-L3  
remote control)  
X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or slower  
Flash sync speed  
Release  
Release mode  
8 (single frame), ! (continuous L), 9 (continuous H), E (self-timer),  
" (delayed remote; ML-L3), # (quick-response remote; ML-L3), J (quiet  
shutter release); interval timer photography supported  
Up to 3 fps (!) or 5 fps (9) (manual focus, mode M or S, shutter speed  
1/250 s or faster, and other settings at default values)  
Frame advance rate  
Self-timer  
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures  
Exposure  
Metering mode  
Metering method  
TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB sensor  
Matrix metering: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color  
matrix metering II (other CPU lenses)  
Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to 8-mm circle in center  
of frame  
Spot metering: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on  
selected focus point  
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Exposure meter  
coupling  
Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV  
Spot metering: 2–20 EV  
CPU  
Mode  
Auto modes (i auto; j auto, flash off ); programmed auto with flexible  
program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual  
(M); scene modes (kportrait; l landscape; pchild; m sports; n close up; o night  
portrait; r night landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; vdusk/dawn; w pet  
portrait; xcandlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food); special effects modes  
(% night vision; g color sketch; ( miniature effect; 3 selective color; 1 silhouette; 2 high  
key; 3 low key)  
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, and  
M modes  
Bracketing  
Exposure bracketing: 3 shots in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV  
White balance bracketing: 3 shots in steps of 1  
Active D-Lighting bracketing: 2 shots  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with A (L) button  
232  
   
Exposure  
ISO sensitivity  
(Recommended  
Exposure Index)  
Active D-Lighting  
ISO 100 – 6400 in steps of 1/3 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, 1, or  
2 EV (ISO 25600 equivalent) above ISO 6400; auto ISO sensitivity control  
available  
Auto, extra high, high, normal, low, off  
Focus  
Autofocus  
Nikon Multi-CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase  
detection, 39 focus points (including 9 cross-type sensor), and AF-assist  
illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.)  
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Detection range  
Lens servo  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto  
AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated  
automatically according to subject status  
Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be used  
Focus point  
AF-area mode  
Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points  
Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 39- point dynamic-area AF, 3D-tracking, auto-  
area AF  
Focus lock  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-  
servo AF) or by pressing A (L) button  
Flash  
Built-in flash  
i, k, p, n, o, s, w, g: Auto flash with auto pop-up  
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release  
Guide Number  
Flash control  
Approx. 12/39, 13/43 with manual flash (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB sensor is available with  
built-in flash and SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-400; i-TTL  
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with matrix and center-weighted  
metering, standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering  
Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow sync, auto slow sync with  
red-eye reduction, fill-flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync with  
red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off  
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV  
Flash mode  
Flash compensation  
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes  
after flash is fired at full output  
Accessory shoe  
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock  
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or  
System (CLS)  
Sync terminal  
SB-700 as a master flash or SU-800 as commander; Flash Color  
Information Communication supported with all CLS-compatible flash  
units  
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)  
White balance  
White balance  
Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight, flash, cloudy,  
shade, preset manual, all except preset manual with fine-tuning.  
233  
 
Live view  
Lens servo  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time-servo AF (AF-F)  
Manual focus (MF)  
AF-area mode  
Autofocus  
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-tracking AF  
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point  
automatically when face-priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)  
Available in i and j modes  
Automatic scene  
selection  
Movie  
Metering  
Metering method  
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor  
Matrix  
Frame size (pixels) and 1920 × 1080, 60i (59.94 fields/s)/ 50i (50 fields/s)*, high/normal  
frame rate  
1920 × 1080, 30 p (progressive)/25p/24p, high/normal  
1280 × 720, 60p/50p, high/normal  
640 × 424, 30p/25p, high/normal  
Frame rates of 30p (actual frame rate 29.97 fps), 60i, and 60p (actual  
frame rate 59.94 fps) are available when NTSC is selected for video  
mode. 25p, 50i, and 50p are available when PAL is selected for video  
mode. Actual frame rate when 24p is selected is 23.976 fps.  
MOV  
File format  
Video compression  
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding  
Audio recording format Linear PCM  
Audio recording device Built-in or external stereo microphone; sensitivity adjustable  
ISO sensitivity  
ISO 200–6400; can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 25600  
equivalent) above ISO 6400  
* Sensor output is about 60 or 50 fps.  
Monitor  
Monitor  
7.5-cm (3-in.), approx. 921k-dot (VGA), vari-angle TFT monitor with 170 °  
viewing angle, approx. 100% frame coverage, and brightness  
adjustment  
Playback  
Playback  
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with  
playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide shows,  
histogram display, highlights, auto image rotation, and image comment  
(up to 36 characters)  
Interface  
USB  
Hi-Speed USB  
Video output  
HDMI output  
Accessory terminal  
NTSC, PAL  
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector  
Wireless remote controller: WR-R10 wireless remote controller (available  
separately)  
Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)  
GPS unit: GP-1 (available separately)  
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)  
Audio input  
234  
 
Supported languages  
Supported languages Arabic, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch,  
English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian,  
Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Portugal and  
Brazil), Romanian, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian  
Power source  
Battery  
AC adapter  
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL14 battery  
EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5A power connector (available  
separately)  
Tripod socket  
Tripod socket  
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)  
Dimensions/weight  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 129.0 × 98.0 × 78.0 mm (5.1 × 3.9 × 3.1 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 555 g (1 lb 3.6 oz) with battery and memory card but without  
body cap; approx. 505 g/1 lb 1.8 oz (camera body only)  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Humidity  
85% or less (no condensation)  
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at the  
temperature specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA): 23 3 °C (73.4 5.4 °F).  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this  
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result  
from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
235  
MH-24 battery charger  
Rated input  
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum  
Rated output  
DC 8.4 V/0.9 A  
Supported batteries  
Charging time  
Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14  
Approx. 1 hour and 30 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 °C/77 °F  
when no charge remains  
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.), excluding plug adapter  
Weight  
Approx. 89 g (3.1 oz), excluding plug adapter  
EN-EL14 rechargeable Li-ion battery  
Type  
Rated capacity  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.4 V/1030 mAh  
Operating temperature 0°C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 48 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens  
Type  
Type G AF-S DX NIKKOR zoom lens with built-in CPU and F mount for use  
exclusively with Nikon DX-format digital SLR cameras  
18–55 mm  
Focal length  
Maximum aperture  
Lens construction  
Angle of view  
f/3.5–5.6  
11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical element)  
76 °–28 ° 50 ´  
Focal length scale  
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)  
Distance information Output to camera  
Zoom  
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring  
Focusing  
Autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor; manual focus  
Vibration reduction  
Lens-shift method using voice coil motors (VCMs)  
Minimum focus distance 0.28 m from focal plane (041) at all zoom positions  
Diaphragm blades  
Diaphragm  
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)  
Fully automatic  
Aperture range  
Metering  
18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22  
55 mm focal length: f/5.6–36  
Full aperture  
Filter-attachment size 52 mm (P=0.75 mm)  
Dimensions  
Approx. 73 mm diameter × 79.5 mm/2.9 × 3.1 in. (distance from camera lens-  
mount flange)  
Weight  
Approx. 265 g (9.3 oz)  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this  
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result  
from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
236  
   
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR  
The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S DX NIKKOR  
18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR.  
Focal length mark  
Focal length scale  
Lens cap  
Mounting mark  
CPU contacts (0200)  
Rear lens cap  
A-M mode switch (015, 40)  
Focus ring (040, 100)  
Vibration reduction switch (0238)  
Zoom ring (023)  
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR is for use exclusively with Nikon DX  
format digital cameras. With this lens, changes to zoom can alter maximum aperture  
by up to 1 1/3 EV. The camera however automatically takes this into account when  
setting exposure, and no modifications to camera settings are required following  
adjustments to zoom.  
D Lens Care  
Keep the CPU contacts clean.  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove smudges and  
fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth  
or lens-cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking  
care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.  
Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens.  
The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element.  
Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible pouch.  
When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the  
hood.  
If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent  
mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.  
Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp parts made from  
reinforced plastic.  
237  
             
Vibration Reduction (VR)  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lenses support vibration reduction (VR),  
which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned,  
allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV at a focal length of  
55 mm (Nikon measurements; effects vary with the user and shooting conditions).  
To use vibration reduction, slide the vibration reduction switch  
to ON. Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera shake  
on the image in the viewfinder and simplifying the process of  
framing the subject and focusing in both autofocus and manual  
focus modes. When the camera is panned, vibration reduction  
applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera  
is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be  
applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the  
camera smoothly in a wide arc.  
Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the vibration reduction switch to OFF.  
Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod, but  
leave it on if the tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod.  
D Vibration Reduction  
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power  
to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not  
a malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.  
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction  
is active, the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released. This does  
not indicate a malfunction; wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before shooting.  
A Using the Built-in Flash  
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and  
remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting (shadows created where the end of the lens  
obscures the built-in flash).  
Camera  
Minimum distance without vignetting  
D7000, D5200, D5100, D5000, D3200, D3100,  
D3000, D300 series, D200, D100, D90, D80,  
D70 series, D60, D50, D40 series  
No vignetting at any focus distance  
Because the built-in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover the angle of view of a  
lens with a focal of 20 mm or more; vignetting will occur at a focal length of 18 mm.  
238  
   
A Supplied Accessories  
52 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52  
A Optional Accessories  
52 mm screw-on filters  
LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps  
Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0815  
Lens Hood HB-45 (attaches as shown at right)  
q
w
q
A A Note on Wide-Angle Lenses  
Autofocus may not provide the desired results with wide– and super-wide–angle lenses in  
the following situations:  
1 The subject does not fill the focus point.  
If the subject does not fill the focus point, the camera may  
focus on the background and the subject may be out of focus.  
Example: A far-off portrait  
subject at some distance  
from the background  
2 The subject contains many fine details.  
The camera may have difficulty focusing on subjects that  
contain many fine details or that are lacking in contrast.  
Example: A field of flowers  
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another subject at  
the same distance and then recompose the photograph. For more information, see  
“Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (034).  
239  
Supported Standards  
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely  
used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes  
of camera.  
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows  
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.  
Exif version 2.3: The D5200 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital  
Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which information stored with  
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output  
on Exif-compliant printers.  
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and  
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without  
first transferring them to a computer.  
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces  
used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual  
data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.  
A Trademark Information  
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United  
States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered  
trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries. PictBridge logo is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of  
the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with  
your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
A FreeType License (FreeType2)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project  
(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.  
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The HarfBuzz Project  
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.  
240  
         
Memory Card Capacity  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on  
a 8 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I card at different image quality and size  
settings.  
Image quality  
Image size  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
File size 1  
37.0 MB  
32.2 MB  
28.5 MB  
30.9 MB  
28.4 MB  
26.5 MB  
27.7 MB  
26.6 MB  
25.6 MB  
24.6 MB  
12.2 MB  
7.4 MB  
3.8 MB  
6.2 MB  
3.7 MB  
1.9 MB  
3.0 MB  
1.9 MB  
1.0 MB  
No. of images 1  
152  
Buffer capacity 2  
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
NEF (RAW)+ JPEG  
fine 3  
173  
192  
178  
192  
203  
196  
204  
210  
217  
507  
853  
1600  
1000  
1600  
3200  
1900  
3200  
6000  
NEF (RAW)+ JPEG  
normal 3  
NEF (RAW)+ JPEG  
basic 3  
NEF (RAW)  
JPEG fine  
8
35  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
JPEG normal  
JPEG basic  
Medium  
Small  
1 All figures are approximate. Results will vary with card type, camera settings, and scene recorded.  
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops when long  
exposure noise reduction (0153) or auto distortion control (0151) is on.  
3 Image size applies to JPEG images only. Size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed. File size is the  
total for NEF (RAW) and JPEG images.  
A File Names  
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn  
is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by  
the camera, and xxx is one of the following three-letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF images,  
“JPG” for JPEG images, or “MOV” for movies. The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG have the same file names but different extensions. Copies created with  
image overlay (0184) and movie edit options (0107) have file names beginning with  
“DSC_” ; copies created with the other options in the retouch menu have file names  
beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001.JPG”). Images recorded with the Color space option  
in the shooting menu set to Adobe RGB (0152) have names that begin with an underscore  
(e.g., “_DSC0001.JPG”).  
241  
     
Battery Life  
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with fully-charged  
batteries varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, the interval between  
shots, and the length of time menus are displayed. Sample figures for EN-EL14  
(1030 mAh) batteries are given below.  
Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1): Approximately 500 shots  
Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2): Approximately 1700 shots  
Movies: Approximately 40 minutes of HD footage at 1080/60i and 1080/50i 3  
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 3 °C/5.4 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm  
f/3.5–5.6G VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity  
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every  
30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on for 4 s; tester waits for  
standby timer to expire after monitor is turned off; flash fired at full power once  
every other shot. Live view not used.  
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens  
under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, continuous high-  
speed release mode, focus mode set to AF-C, image quality set to JPEG basic,  
image size set to M (medium), white balance set to v, ISO sensitivity set to ISO  
100, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three  
times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are  
then taken in succession and monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off;  
cycle repeated once standby timer has expired.  
3 Measured at 23°C/73.4°F ( 3°C/5.4°F) with the camera at default settings and an  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under conditions specified by  
the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be  
up to 20 minutes in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these limits  
are reached if the camera temperature rises.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
Using the monitor  
Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
Repeated autofocus operations  
Taking NEF (RAW) photographs  
Slow shutter speeds  
Using a GP-1 GPS unit  
Using a WU-1a wireless mobile adapter  
Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL14 batteries:  
Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.  
Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left  
unused.  
242  
   
Index  
j (red-eye reduction)......... 46, 47  
p (slow sync) .................... 46, 47  
q (rear-curtain sync)...... 46, 47  
Y (Flash compensation) ............ 67  
E (Exposure compensation)...... 65  
e (AE bracketing)................... 83  
f (WB bracketing) ................ 83  
g (ADL bracketing) ....................... 83  
d (Help)............................................. 11  
m (White balance)......................... 76  
L (Preset manual) ....................... 79  
3 (“Beep” indicator).....................161  
I (focus indicator).... 22, 38, 40, 63  
N (flash-ready indicator) 4, 23, 208  
a (live view) ...........................93, 101  
t (Memory buffer).........22, 30, 241  
Assign Fn button ...................10, 165  
Auto (White balance).................... 76  
Auto bracketing.....................83, 164  
Auto distortion control ..............151  
Auto flash.......................................... 47  
Auto image rotation....................174  
Auto info display ..........................171  
Auto ISO sensitivity control......154  
Auto off timers ..............................160  
Auto-area AF (AF-area mode).... 36  
Autoexposure lock......................... 63  
Autofocus.....................33–39, 94–96  
Auto-servo AF.................................. 33  
Available settings.........................221  
Symbols  
i (Auto mode)............................3, 21  
j (Auto (flash off) mode) .......3, 21  
k (Portrait) ...................................3, 24  
l (Landscape).............................3, 24  
p (Child)........................................3, 25  
m (Sports)......................................3, 25  
n (Close up) .................................3, 25  
h (Scene)...............................3, 26  
o (Night portrait)........................... 26  
r (Night landscape)...................... 26  
s (Party/indoor)............................. 26  
t (Beach/snow).............................. 27  
u (Sunset)......................................... 27  
v (Dusk/dawn) ............................... 27  
w (Pet portrait) ............................... 27  
x (Candlelight)................................. 28  
y (Blossom)...................................... 28  
z (Autumn colors)......................... 28  
0 (Food) ............................................. 28  
q (Special effects) ........... 3, 111  
% (Night vision) ....................... 3, 112  
g (Color sketch) .............3, 112, 114  
( (Miniature effect) ......3, 112, 115  
3 (Selective color).........3, 113, 116  
1 (Silhouette)........................... 3, 113  
2 (High key).............................. 3, 113  
3 (Low key)............................... 3, 113  
P (Programmed auto).........3, 55, 56  
S (Shutter-priority auto) ....3, 55, 57  
A (Aperture-priority auto).3, 55, 58  
M (Manual) .............................3, 55, 59  
U (flexible program) ...................... 56  
8 (Single frame) ............................ 29  
! (Continuous L)......................... 29  
9 (Continuous H)........................ 29  
E (Self-timer)............................ 29, 31  
" (Delayed remote (ML-L3))... 29,  
B
Battery............................. 14, 209, 236  
Beep..................................................161  
Bit rate..............................................103  
Black-and-white............................181  
Blue intensifier (Filter effects) ..182  
Body cap..................................... 1, 209  
Border (PictBridge) ......................138  
Bracketing................................83, 164  
Built-in AF-assist illuminator ..... 35,  
Numerics  
2016-pixel RGB sensor........62,164,  
3D color matrix metering............ 62  
3D-tracking (AF-area mode) 36, 37  
A
A/V cable.........................................145  
AC adapter............................ 209, 212  
Access lamp...................................... 22  
Accessories .....................................209  
Accessory terminal ............ 175, 210  
Accessory terminal accessories......  
Built-in flash ............................45, 202  
Bulb..................................................... 60  
Burst............................................. 29, 74  
C
Active D-Lighting........................... 69  
Add items (My Menu) .................196  
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing  
set)..................................................... 83  
Adobe RGB .....................................152  
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing  
set)..................................................... 83  
AE lock................................................ 63  
AE-L ..................................................... 63  
AE-L/AF-L button................39, 63, 166  
AF....................................33–39, 94–96  
AF area brackets ...................... 17, 21  
AF-A..................................................... 33  
AF-area mode........................... 36, 95  
AF-assist...........................................158  
AF-assist illuminator.............35, 203  
AF-C............................................33, 157  
AF-F..................................................... 94  
AF-S.............................................. 33, 94  
A-M mode switch..................40, 237  
Angle of view.................................203  
Aperture .............................. 55, 58, 59  
Aperture-priority auto.................. 58  
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ...........166  
Calendar playback .......................124  
Camera Control Pro 2..................209  
Capture NX 2..................................209  
CEC ....................................................147  
Center-weighted metering......... 62  
Charger ........................... 14, 209, 236  
Choose start/end point..............107  
Clean image sensor.....................214  
Clock ..........................................16, 173  
Clock battery.................................... 19  
Cloudy (White balance) ............... 76  
CLS.....................................................205  
Color balance.................................183  
Color outline ..................................189  
Color sketch ......................... 114, 189  
Color space.....................................152  
Color temperature ......................... 77  
Command dial....................................8  
Compatible lenses .......................199  
Continuous (Release mode)....... 29  
Continuous-servo AF ...........33, 157  
CPU contacts..................................200  
CPU lens....................................19, 199  
Creative Lighting System ..........205  
# (Quick-response remote (ML-L3))  
J (Quiet shutter release)............ 29  
c (Single-point AF) ..................... 36  
d (Dynamic-area AF) .................. 36  
e (Auto-area AF) .......................... 36  
f (3D-tracking)...................... 36, 37  
6 (Face-priority AF) ............... 95, 96  
7 (Wide-area AF) .................... 95, 96  
8 (Normal-area AF)................ 95, 96  
9 (Subject-tracking AF) ..... 95, 96  
L (Matrix metering)...................... 62  
M (Center-weighted metering). 62  
N (Spot metering) ......................... 62  
o (auto flash) .................... 46, 47  
243  
   
Cross screen (Filter effects).......182  
Custom Settings...........................155  
Cyanotype ......................................181  
Flash control ..................................164  
Flash mode....................................... 46  
Flash range....................................... 48  
Flash ready indicator .......4, 23, 208  
Flash sync speed ...................48, 232  
Flexible program............................ 56  
Flicker reduction .................102, 172  
Fluorescent (White balance)76, 77  
Fn button..................................10, 165  
f-number...........................55, 58, 199  
Focal length ...................................203  
Focal length scale ........................237  
Focal plane mark............................ 41  
Focus.................... 33–41, 94–96, 100  
Focus indicator............22, 38, 40, 63  
Focus lock ......................................... 38  
Focus mode................................33, 94  
Focusing screen............................231  
Focusing the viewfinder.............. 17  
Focus-mode switch .................15, 40  
Format..............................................168  
Format memory card...........18, 168  
Frame interval (Slide show)......130  
Frame size/frame rate.................103  
Framing grid ...........................98, 161  
Front-curtain sync.......................... 47  
Full-frame playback.....................118  
Full-time-servo AF ......................... 94  
Image review.................................149  
Image size......................................... 44  
Incandescent (White balance) .. 76  
Info display format ......................169  
In-focus indicator.......22, 38, 40, 63  
Information display................ 6, 169  
Infrared receiver ............................. 31  
Interval timer shooting................ 51  
ISO display......................................161  
ISO sensitivity.........................49, 153  
i-TTL ..................................................164  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital  
SLR...................................................164  
D
Date and time.........................16, 173  
Date counter..................................163  
Date format.............................16, 173  
Daylight saving time............16, 173  
DCF version 2.0....................152, 240  
Delayed remote (ML-L3)........29, 31  
Delete...............................................127  
Delete all images..........................128  
Delete current image..................127  
Delete selected images .............128  
Device control (HDMI)................147  
Digital Print Order Format .......140,  
J
JPEG .................................................... 42  
JPEG basic......................................... 42  
JPEG fine............................................ 42  
JPEG normal..................................... 42  
Diopter adjustment control .......17,  
L
Direct sunlight (White balance).76  
Distortion control ........................188  
D-Lighting ......................................180  
DPOF.............................. 140, 143, 240  
DPOF print order..........................143  
Dynamic-area AF.............................36  
Landscape (Set Picture Control) 86  
Language.................................16, 173  
Large (Image size).......................... 44  
Lens............................15, 19, 199, 237  
Lens focus ring.......................40, 237  
Lens mount ..................................1, 41  
Lens vibration reduction switch.....  
Live view...................................93, 101  
Lock mirror up for cleaning......216  
Long exposure NR .......................153  
Low-angle shots ................................5  
E
Edit movie..............................107, 110  
Electronic rangefinder.........40, 159  
EV steps for exposure cntrl.......159  
Exif version 2.3 .....................152, 240  
Exposure........................55, 62, 63, 65  
Exposure bracketing......................83  
Exposure compensation...............65  
Exposure delay mode.................162  
Exposure indicator...................59, 97  
Exposure lock ...................................63  
Exposure meters..............................23  
Exposure mode................................55  
Exposure program.......................223  
External microphone.........104, 210  
Eye-Fi upload.................................176  
G
GPS.................................122, 175, 210  
GPS data..........................................122  
GPS unit..................................175, 210  
Green intensifier (Filter effects)......  
M
Manage Picture Control............... 90  
Manual........................................ 40, 59  
Manual focus ...................40, 94, 100  
Manual movie settings...............104  
Matrix metering.............................. 62  
Maximum aperture ..............40, 199  
Maximum sensitivity...................154  
Medium (Image size) .................... 44  
Memory buffer......................... 22, 30  
Memory card ....... 15, 168, 211, 241  
Memory card capacity................241  
Metering............................................ 62  
Microphone....................................103  
Miniature effect ...................115, 191  
Minimum aperture................. 19, 55  
Minimum shutter speed............154  
Mirror........................................... 1, 216  
Mode dial.............................................3  
Monitor.......................5, 93, 118, 168  
Monitor brightness......................168  
Monochrome.................................181  
H
H.264.................................................234  
HDMI........................................146, 240  
HDMI-CEC .......................................147  
HDR (high dynamic range)......... 71  
Help..................................................... 11  
Hi (Sensitivity) ................................. 49  
High definition.....................146, 240  
High Dynamic Range (HDR)....... 71  
High ISO NR....................................153  
High-angle shots...............................5  
Highlights ..............................119, 149  
Histogram.................... 120, 149, 183  
F
Face-priority AF ...............................95  
File information ............................119  
File number sequence................162  
Filter effects......................88, 89, 182  
Filters................................................209  
Fine-tuning white balance ..........78  
Firmware version..........................177  
Fisheye.............................................189  
Flash.............................23, 45, 46, 204  
Flash (White balance)....................76  
Flash cntrl for built-in flash.......164  
Flash compensation.......................67  
I
Image comment...........................174  
Image Dust Off ref photo..........171  
Image overlay................................184  
Image quality .................................. 42  
244  
Monochrome (Set Picture Control)  
Slot empty release lock..............166  
Slow sync .......................................... 47  
Small (Image size) .......................... 44  
Soft (Filter effects)........................182  
Special effects mode...................111  
Speedlight ......................................204  
Spot metering ................................. 62  
sRGB..................................................152  
Standard (Set Picture Control)... 86  
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital  
SLR ...................................................164  
Standby timer............... 23, 160, 175  
Start printing (PictBridge)139, 142  
Storage folder................................151  
Straighten .......................................188  
Subject-tracking AF....................... 95  
Q
Quick retouch................................188  
Quick-response remote (ML-L3)29,  
Mounting mark......................15, 237  
MOV ..................................................241  
Movie quality.................................103  
Movie settings...............................103  
Movie-record button ..................101  
Movies..............................................101  
Multiple exposure.......................... 73  
My Menu .........................................195  
Quiet shutter release .................... 29  
R
Rangefinder....................................159  
Rank items (My Menu)................198  
Rear-curtain sync ........................... 47  
Recent settings .............................195  
Red intensifier (Filter effects) ...182  
Red-eye correction ......................180  
Red-eye reduction ......................... 47  
Release mode .................................. 29  
Remote control......................31, 210  
Remote cord ...........................60, 210  
Remote on duration (ML-L3)....161  
Remote shutter release..............175  
Remove items (My Menu).........197  
Reset ................................ 53, 150, 156  
Reset custom settings ................156  
Reset shooting menu .................150  
Resize................................................187  
Retouch menu...............................178  
Reverse dial rotation...................166  
Reverse indicators........................166  
RGB.......................................... 120, 152  
RGB Histogram..............................120  
Rotate tall........................................149  
N
NEF ...................................................... 42  
NEF (RAW)................................42, 186  
NEF (RAW) processing................186  
Neutral (Set Picture Control)...... 86  
Nikon Transfer 2............................134  
Non-CPU lens ................................201  
Normal-area AF............................... 95  
Number of focus points.............157  
Number of shots...........................242  
T
Television ........................................145  
Thumbnail playback ...................123  
Time .................................................... 60  
Time stamp (PictBridge) ............138  
Time zone.................................16, 173  
Time zone and date.....................173  
Timer............................................ 31, 51  
Toning ......................................... 88, 89  
Trim ...................................................181  
Trimming movies .........................107  
Type D lens .....................................200  
Type G lens .....................................200  
O
Optional flash...................... 164, 204  
Output resolution (HDMI).........147  
Overview data...............................122  
P
Page size (PictBridge) .................138  
Perspective control......................190  
Photo information ............. 119, 149  
PictBridge.............................. 137, 240  
Picture Controls ....................... 86, 87  
Playback ..........................................118  
Playback display options...........149  
Playback folder..............................148  
Playback information........ 119, 149  
Playback menu..............................148  
Playback zoom..............................125  
Portrait (Set Picture Control)...... 86  
Power connector................ 209, 212  
Power switch.......................................2  
Preset manual (White balance) 76,  
Press the shutter-release button  
all the way down ................... 22, 23  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway...................................... 22, 23  
Print (DPOF).......................... 140, 144  
Print date.........................................163  
Print select......................................140  
Printing ............................................137  
Programmed auto.......................... 56  
Protecting photographs............126  
U
S
USB cable .............................. 134, 137  
UTC.......................................... 122, 175  
Save selected frame ....................110  
Scene auto selector....................... 98  
Scene mode ..................................... 24  
Selective color..................... 116, 192  
Self-portrait.........................................5  
Self-timer...........................29, 31, 160  
Sensitivity.................................49, 153  
Sepia .................................................181  
Set Picture Control......................... 87  
Setup menu....................................167  
Shade (White balance)................. 76  
Shooting data................................121  
Shooting menu.............................150  
Shutter-priority auto..................... 57  
Shutter-release button.. 22, 23, 38,  
Shutter-release button AE-L.....159  
Side-by-side comparison ..........194  
Single frame (Release mode)..... 29  
Single-point AF (AF-area mode)36  
Single-servo AF........................ 33, 94  
Size .............................................44, 103  
Skylight (Filter effects)................182  
Slide show.......................................130  
V
Vibration Reduction.............15, 238  
Video mode.......................... 145, 172  
Viewfinder........................... 4, 17, 231  
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ............. 32  
Viewfinder grid display ..............161  
ViewNX 2............................... 132, 134  
Vivid (Set Picture Control)........... 86  
Volume................................... 106, 131  
W
Warm filter (Filter effects)..........182  
WB........................................................ 76  
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing  
set) ..................................................... 83  
White balance.................................. 76  
Wide-area AF ................................... 95  
Wireless mobile adapter............210  
Wireless remote controller........210  
245  
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation  
in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON  
CORPORATION.  
SB2K01(11)  
6MB16711-01  

Radio Shack 65 541 User Manual
Pyramid Car Audio PB1281X User Manual
Philips Food Processor HR7740 User Manual
Panasonic DV PROLINE AG DVX100BAN User Manual
Panasonic AJ HDC27HE User Manual
Nikon Camcorder CT1A01(11) User Manual
NEC MultiSync LCD2190UXi User Manual
Morphy Richards Cocktail blender User Manual
Mazda 2009 CX 7 User Manual
Kenwood Car Stereo System TS 2000 User Manual